Samsung F8278X User`s manual

S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X
/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
8-BIT CMOS
MICROCONTROLLERS
USER'S MANUAL
Revision 1.4
Important Notice
The information in this publication has been carefully
checked and is believed to be entirely accurate at
the time of publication. Samsung assumes no
responsibility, however, for possible errors or
omissions, or for any consequences resulting from
the use of the information contained herein.
Samsung reserves the right to make changes in its
products or product specifications with the intent to
improve function or design at any time and without
notice and is not required to update this
documentation to reflect such changes.
This publication does not convey to a purchaser of
semiconductor devices described herein any license
under the patent rights of Samsung or others.
Samsung makes no warranty, representation, or
guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for
any particular purpose, nor does Samsung assume
any liability arising out of the application or use of
any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any
and all liability, including without limitation any
consequential or incidental damages.
"Typical" parameters can and do vary in different
applications. All operating parameters, including
"Typicals" must be validated for each customer
application by the customer's technical experts.
Samsung products are not designed, intended, or
authorized for use as components in systems
intended for surgical implant into the body, for other
applications intended to support or sustain life, or for
any other application in which the failure of the
Samsung product could create a situation where
personal injury or death may occur.
Should the Buyer purchase or use a Samsung
product for any such unintended or unauthorized
application, the Buyer shall indemnify and hold
Samsung and its officers, employees, subsidiaries,
affiliates, and distributors harmless against all
claims, costs, damages, expenses, and reasonable
attorney fees arising out of, either directly or
indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death that
may be associated with such unintended or
unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that
Samsung was negligent regarding the design or
manufacture of said product.
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers
User's Manual, Revision 1.4
Publication Number: 21.4-S3-C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X-042007
© 2007
Samsung Electronics
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electric or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written consent of Samsung Electronics.
Samsung Electronics' microcontroller business has been awarded full ISO-14001
certification (BSI Certificate No. FM24653). All semiconductor products are
designed and manufactured in accordance with the highest quality standards and
objectives.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
San #24 Nongseo-Dong, Giheung-Gu
Yongin-City, Gyeonggi-Do, Korea
C.P.O. Box #37, Suwon 446-711
TEL: (82)-(31)-209-5238
FAX: (82)-(31)-209-6494
Home-Page URL:
Http://www.samsungsemi.com
Printed in the Republic of Korea
NOTIFICATION OF REVISIONS
ORIGINATOR:
Samsung Electronics, LSI Development Group, Gi-Heung, South Korea
PRODUCT NAME:
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X 8-bit
CMOS Microcontroller
DOCUMENT NAME:
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X User's Manual,
Revision1.4
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
21.4-S3-C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X-042007
EFFECTIVE DATE:
April, 2007
SUMMARY:
As a result of additional product testing and evaluation, some specifications
published in the S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X User's
Manual, Revision 1, have been changed. These changes for
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X microcontroller,
which are described in detail in the Revision Descriptions section below,
are related to the followings:
—
Chapter 16. Embedded flash memory interface
—
Chapter 17. Electrical Data
—
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
—
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
DIRECTIONS:
Please note the changes in your copy (copies) of the
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X User's Manual, Revision 1.
Or, simply attach the Revision Descriptions of the next page to
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X User's Manual, Revision 1.
REVISION HISTORY
Revision
Date
Remark
0
February, 2005
1
April, 2005
First edition. Reviewed by Finechips.
1.1
July, 2005
Second edition. Reviewed by Finechips.
1.2
August, 2005
Third edition. Reviewed by Finechips.
1.3
May, 2006
Fourth edition. Reviewed by Finechips
1.4
April, 2007
Fifth edition. Reviewed by Finechips
Preliminary spec for internal release only.
REVISION DESCRIPTIONS
1. Electrical Data
Table 17-12. A.C. Electrical Characteristics for Internal Flash ROM
(TA
=
− 25 °C
to
+ 85 °C, VDD = 2.0 V
Parameter
to
3.6 V)
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Ftp
−
30
−
−
µs
Chip erasing time (2)
Ftp1
−
50
−
−
ms
Sector erasing time (3)
Ftp2
−
10
−
−
ms
Data access time
FtRS
−
−
25
−
ns
FNwe
−
−
−
10,000(4)
Times
Programming time
(1)
Number of writing/erasing
NOTES:
1. The programming time is the time during which one byte (8-bit) is programmed.
2. The chip erasing time is the time during which all 16K byte block is erased.
3. The sector erasing time is the time during which all 128 byte block is erased.
4. Maximum number of writing/erasing is 10,000 times for full-flash(S3F8275) and 100 times for half-flash
(S3F8278X/F8274X).
5. The chip erasing is available in Tool Program Mode only.
2. Condition of Operating Voltage
Condition of operating voltage is modified “fx = 0 − 4.2MHz” to “fx = 0.4 − 4.2MHz” at 2.0V – 3.6V and
“fx = 0 − 8MHz” to “fx = 0.4 − 8MHz” at 2.5V − 3.6V in the page 17-2.
3. CHAPTHER 16. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
This chapter is modified for only S3F8275X.
4. CHAPTHER 7. Clock Circuit
The contents of OSCCON.7 should be changed “ 0 = Select normal circuit for sub oscillator” into “ 0 = Initial state”
in the page 4-21 and Figure 7-10.
It is added “NOTE: The OSCCON.7 should be maintained to “1”, during the sub oscillator operation.” In the page
4-21 and Figure 7-10.
The figure 7-7 is modified partly.
Descriptions of Revision 1.4
1. Smart Option Area
The Figures are modified about smart option area. Those are “Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space” and
“Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area”.
2. CHAPTHER 17. Electrical Data
It is changed “VDD = 2.0 V to 3.6 V” into “VDD = 2.2 V to 3.6 V” in the Table 17-12.
3. DEVICE NAME
The device name is changed S3C8275/F8275/C8278/F8278/C8274/F8274 to
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X. The ‘X’ means ‘Commercial type’.
Preface
The S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Microcontroller User's Manual is designed for
application designers and programmers who are using the S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
microcontroller for application development. It is organized in two main parts:
Part I
Programming Model
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Part I contains software-related information to familiarize you with the microcontroller's architecture, programming
model, instruction set, and interrupt structure. It has six chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Product Overview
Address Spaces
Addressing Modes
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Control Registers
Interrupt Structure
Instruction Set
Chapter 1, "Product Overview," is a high-level introduction to
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X with general product descriptions, as well as detailed
information about individual pin characteristics and pin circuit types.
Chapter 2, "Address Spaces," describes program and data memory spaces, the internal register file, and register
addressing. Chapter 2 also describes working register addressing, as well as system stack and user-defined
stack operations.
Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes," contains detailed descriptions of the addressing modes that are supported by the
S3C8-series CPU.
Chapter 4, "Control Registers," contains overview tables for all mapped system and peripheral control register
values, as well as detailed one-page descriptions in a standardized format. You can use these easy-to-read,
alphabetically organized, register descriptions as a quick-reference source when writing programs.
Chapter 5, "Interrupt Structure," describes the S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X interrupt
structure in detail and further prepares you for additional information presented in the individual hardware module
descriptions in Part II.
Chapter 6, "Instruction Set," describes the features and conventions of the instruction set used for all S3C8-series
microcontrollers. Several summary tables are presented for orientation and reference. Detailed descriptions of
each instruction are presented in a standard format. Each instruction description includes one or more practical
examples of how to use the instruction when writing an application program.
A basic familiarity with the information in Part I will help you to understand the hardware module descriptions in
Part II. If you are not yet familiar with the S3C8-series microcontroller family and are reading this manual for the
first time, we recommend that you first read Chapters 1–3 carefully. Then, briefly look over the detailed
information in Chapters 4, 5, and 6. Later, you can reference the information in Part I as necessary.
Part II "hardware Descriptions," has detailed information about specific hardware components of the
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X microcontroller. Also included in Part II are electrical,
mechanical, Flash MCU, and development tools data. It has 14 chapters:
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
Clock Circuit
RESET and Power-Down
I/O Ports
Basic Timer
Timer 1
Watch Timer
LCD Controller/Driver
Serial I/O Interface
Chapter 15
Chapter 16
Chapter 17
Chapter 18
Chapter 19
Chapter 20
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
Battery Level Detector
Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Electrical Data
Mechanical Data
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X
Flash MCU
Development Tools
iii
Table of Contents
Part I — Programming Model
Chapter 1
Product Overview
S3C8-Series Microcontrollers .......................................................................................................................1-1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Microcontroller.......................................................1-1
Flash..............................................................................................................................................................1-1
Features ........................................................................................................................................................1-2
Block Diagram ...............................................................................................................................................1-3
Pin Assignment .............................................................................................................................................1-4
Pin Descriptions ............................................................................................................................................1-6
Pin Circuits ....................................................................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 2
Address Spaces
Overview........................................................................................................................................................2-1
Program Memory (ROM)...............................................................................................................................2-2
Smart Option.........................................................................................................................................2-3
Register Architecture.....................................................................................................................................2-5
Register Page Pointer (PP) ..................................................................................................................2-8
Register Set 1 .......................................................................................................................................2-10
Register Set 2 .......................................................................................................................................2-10
Prime Register Space...........................................................................................................................2-11
Working Registers ................................................................................................................................2-12
Using the Register Points .....................................................................................................................2-13
Register Addressing ......................................................................................................................................2-15
Common Working Register Area (C0H–CFH) .....................................................................................2-17
4-Bit Working Register Addressing ......................................................................................................2-18
8-Bit Working Register Addressing ......................................................................................................2-20
System and User Stack.................................................................................................................................2-22
Chapter 3
Addressing Modes
Overview........................................................................................................................................................3-1
Register Addressing Mode (R)......................................................................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR) ........................................................................................................3-3
Indexed Addressing Mode (X).......................................................................................................................3-7
Direct Address Mode (DA) ............................................................................................................................3-10
Indirect Address Mode (IA) ...........................................................................................................................3-12
Relative Address Mode (RA).........................................................................................................................3-13
Immediate Mode (IM) ....................................................................................................................................3-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
v
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 4
Control Registers
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Chapter 5
Interrupt Structure
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Interrupt Types ..................................................................................................................................... 5-2
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Interrupt Structure ................................................................................. 5-3
Interrupt Vector Addresses .................................................................................................................. 5-4
Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI) ...................................................................................... 5-6
System-Level Interrupt Control Registers............................................................................................ 5-6
Interrupt Processing Control Points ..................................................................................................... 5-7
Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers ................................................................................................. 5-8
System Mode Register (SYM) ............................................................................................................. 5-9
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) ............................................................................................................. 5-10
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)............................................................................................................ 5-11
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)......................................................................................................... 5-13
Interrupt Pending Function Types........................................................................................................ 5-14
Interrupt Source Polling Sequence ...................................................................................................... 5-15
Interrupt Service Routines ................................................................................................................... 5-15
Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses ............................................................................................... 5-16
Nesting of Vectored Interrupts ............................................................................................................. 5-16
Instruction Pointer (IP) ......................................................................................................................... 5-16
Fast Interrupt Processing..................................................................................................................... 5-16
Chapter 6
Instruction Set
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Data Types........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Register Addressing............................................................................................................................. 6-1
Addressing Modes ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
Flags Register (FLAGS)....................................................................................................................... 6-6
Flag Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Instruction Set Notation........................................................................................................................ 6-8
Condition Codes .................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Instruction Descriptions........................................................................................................................ 6-13
vi
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Chapter 7
Clock Circuit
Overview........................................................................................................................................................7-1
System Clock Circuit ............................................................................................................................7-1
Main Oscillator Circuits.........................................................................................................................7-2
Sub Oscillator Circuits ..........................................................................................................................7-2
Clock Status During Power-Down Modes ............................................................................................7-3
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) ..........................................................................................7-4
Clock Output Control Register (CLOCON)...........................................................................................7-5
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON) ................................................................................................7-6
Switching the CPU Clock......................................................................................................................7-7
Chapter 8
RESET and Power-Down
System Reset ................................................................................................................................................8-1
Overview...............................................................................................................................................8-1
Normal Mode Reset Operation.............................................................................................................8-1
Hardware Reset Values........................................................................................................................8-2
Power-Down Modes ......................................................................................................................................8-5
Stop Mode ............................................................................................................................................8-5
Idle Mode ..............................................................................................................................................8-6
Chapter 9
I/O Ports
Overview........................................................................................................................................................9-1
Port Data Registers ..............................................................................................................................9-2
port 0.....................................................................................................................................................9-3
port 1.....................................................................................................................................................9-7
port 2.....................................................................................................................................................9-11
port 3.....................................................................................................................................................9-13
Port 4 ....................................................................................................................................................9-15
Port 5 ....................................................................................................................................................9-17
Port 6 ....................................................................................................................................................9-19
Chapter 10
Basic Timer
Overview........................................................................................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) ...............................................................................................10-2
Basic Timer Function Description.........................................................................................................10-3
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
vii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 11
Timer 1
One 16-bit Timer Mode (Timer 1) ................................................................................................................. 11-1
Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 11-1
Function Description ............................................................................................................................ 11-1
Two 8-bit Timers Mode (Timer A and B) ...................................................................................................... 11-4
Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
Function Description ............................................................................................................................ 11-4
Chapter 12
Watch Timer
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) ............................................................................................ 12-2
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram............................................................................................................... 12-3
Chapter 13
LCD Controller/Driver
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
LCD Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 13-2
LCD RAM Address Area ...................................................................................................................... 13-3
LCD Control Register (LCON) ............................................................................................................. 13-4
LCD Voltage Dividing Resistor ............................................................................................................ 13-5
Common (COM) Signals...................................................................................................................... 13-6
Segment (SEG) Signals....................................................................................................................... 13-6
Chapter 14
Serial I/O Interface
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Programming Procedure...................................................................................................................... 14-1
SIO Control Registers (SIOCON) ........................................................................................................ 14-2
SIO Pre-Scaler Register (SIOPS) ........................................................................................................ 14-3
SIO Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 14-3
Serial I/O Timing Diagram (SIO) .......................................................................................................... 14-4
Chapter 15
Battery Level Detector
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Battery Level Detector Control Register (BLDCON)............................................................................ 15-2
viii
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 16
Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Overview........................................................................................................................................................16-1
User Program Mode ......................................................................................................................................16-2
Flash Memory Control Registers (User Program Mode)......................................................................16-2
ISPTM (On-Board Programming) Sector .......................................................................................................16-5
Sector Erase..................................................................................................................................................16-7
Programming .................................................................................................................................................16-9
Reading .........................................................................................................................................................16-11
Hard Lock Protection.....................................................................................................................................16-12
Chapter 17
Electrical Data
Overview........................................................................................................................................................17-1
Chapter 18
Mechanical Data
Overview........................................................................................................................................................18-1
Chapter 19
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X Flash MCU
Overview........................................................................................................................................................19-1
Operating Mode Characteristics ...........................................................................................................19-5
Chapter 20
Development Tools
Overview........................................................................................................................................................20-1
SHINE ...................................................................................................................................................20-1
SAMA Assembler..................................................................................................................................20-1
SASM88................................................................................................................................................20-1
HEX2ROM ............................................................................................................................................20-1
Target Boards .......................................................................................................................................20-1
TB8275/8/4 Target Board .....................................................................................................................20-3
SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8) ..................................................................................................................20-6
Idle LED ................................................................................................................................................20-6
Stop LED ..............................................................................................................................................20-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
ix
List of Figures
Figure
Number
1-1
1-2
Title
Page
Number
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................1-3
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Assignments
(64-QFP-1420F) .........................................................................................................1-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Assignments
(64-LQFP-1010) .........................................................................................................1-5
Pin Circuit Type A.......................................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type B (nRESET) .....................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type E-4 (P0, P1) .....................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type H-4 ...................................................................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type H-8 (P2.1–P2.7, P3).........................................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type H-9 (P4, P5, P6)...............................................................................1-10
Pin Circuit Type H-10 (P2.0).......................................................................................1-11
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
Program Memory Address Space ..............................................................................2-2
Smart Option...............................................................................................................2-3
Internal Register File Organization (S3C8275X)........................................................2-6
Internal Register File Organization (S3C8278X/C8274X)..........................................2-7
Register Page Pointer (PP) ........................................................................................2-8
Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map...............................2-11
8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices) .....................................................................2-12
Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block .............................................................2-13
Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block .....................................................2-14
16-Bit Register Pair ....................................................................................................2-15
Register File Addressing ............................................................................................2-16
Common Working Register Area................................................................................2-17
4-Bit Working Register Addressing ............................................................................2-19
4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example .............................................................2-19
8-Bit Working Register Addressing ............................................................................2-20
8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example .............................................................2-21
Stack Operations ........................................................................................................2-22
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
Register Addressing ...................................................................................................3-2
Working Register Addressing.....................................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing to Register File.............................................................3-3
Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory .....................................................3-4
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File ..............................................3-5
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory ..........................3-6
Indexed Addressing to Register File ..........................................................................3-7
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset ..........................3-8
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory......................................................3-9
Direct Addressing for Load Instructions .....................................................................3-10
Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions ......................................................3-11
Indirect Addressing.....................................................................................................3-12
Relative Addressing....................................................................................................3-13
Immediate Addressing................................................................................................3-14
4-1
Register Description Format.......................................................................................4-4
1-3
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xi
List of Figures
Figure
Number
Title
Page
Number
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
S3C8-Series Interrupt Types ..................................................................................... 5-2
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Interrupt Structure ....................................................... 5-3
ROM Vector Address Area ........................................................................................ 5-4
Interrupt Function Diagram ........................................................................................ 5-7
System Mode Register (SYM) ................................................................................... 5-9
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) ................................................................................... 5-10
Interrupt Request Priority Groups .............................................................................. 5-11
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) ................................................................................. 5-12
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)............................................................................... 5-13
6-1
System Flags Register (FLAGS) ............................................................................... 6-6
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fx) ................................................................................... 7-2
External Oscillator (fx)................................................................................................ 7-2
RC Oscillator (fx)........................................................................................................ 7-2
Crystal Oscillator (fxt)................................................................................................. 7-2
External Oscillator (fxt)............................................................................................... 7-2
System Clock Circuit Diagram ................................................................................... 7-3
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) ............................................................... 7-4
Clock Output Control Register (CLOCON) ................................................................ 7-5
Clock Output Block Diagram...................................................................................... 7-5
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON) ..................................................................... 7-6
STOP Control Register (STPCON)............................................................................ 7-8
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X I/O Port Data Register Format .................................... 9-2
Port 0 High-Byte Control Register (P0CONH)........................................................... 9-4
Port 0 Low-Byte Control Register (P0CONL) ............................................................ 9-4
Port 0 Pull-up Control Register (P0PUR) .................................................................. 9-5
External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)...................................... 9-5
External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND) ....................................................... 9-6
Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH)........................................................... 9-8
Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL) ............................................................ 9-8
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUR) .................................................................. 9-9
External Interrupt Control Register, High Byte (EXTICONH) .................................... 9-9
External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)...................................... 9-10
External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND) ....................................................... 9-10
Port 2 High-byte Control Register (P2CONH) ........................................................... 9-11
Port 2 Low-byte Control Register (P2CONL)............................................................. 9-12
Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR) .................................................................. 9-12
Port 3 High Byte Control Register (P3CONH) ........................................................... 9-13
Port 3 Low Byte Control Register (P3CONL) ............................................................ 9-14
Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR) .................................................................. 9-14
xii
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
List of Figures (Continued)
Page
Number
Title
Page
Number
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH) ...........................................................9-15
Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL).............................................................9-16
Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH) ...........................................................9-17
Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL).............................................................9-18
Port 6 Control Register (P6CON) ...............................................................................9-19
10-1
10-2
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) .....................................................................10-2
Basic Timer Block Diagram ........................................................................................10-4
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON).........................................................................11-2
Timer 1 Block Diagram (One 16-bit Mode) ................................................................11-3
Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON).........................................................................11-5
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)............................................................................11-6
Timer A Block Diagram(Two 8-bit Timers Mode) .......................................................11-7
Timer B Block Diagram (Two 8-bit Timers Mode) ......................................................11-8
12-1
12-2
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) ...................................................................12-2
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram .....................................................................................12-3
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
LCD Function Diagram ...............................................................................................13-1
LCD Circuit Diagram...................................................................................................13-2
LCD Display Data RAM Organization ........................................................................13-3
LCD Control Register (LCON)....................................................................................13-4
Internal Voltage Dividing Resistor Connection...........................................................13-5
Select/No-Select Signals in Static Display Mode .......................................................13-6
Select/No-Select Signal in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode .....................................13-7
Select/No-Select Signal in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode .....................................13-7
LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode............13-8
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON)...........................................................14-2
SIO Prescaler Register (SIOPS) ................................................................................14-3
SIO Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................14-3
Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0) ..............14-4
Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1) ...............14-4
15-1
15-2
Block Diagram for Voltage Level Detect.....................................................................15-1
Battery Level Detect Circuit and Control Register......................................................15-2
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) .................................................................16-2
Flash Memory User-Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) ..................................16-3
Flash Memory Sector Address Register, High Byte (FMSECH) ................................16-4
Flash Memory Sector Address Register, Low Byte (FMSECL) .................................16-4
Program Memory Address Space ..............................................................................16-5
Sector Configurations in User Program Mode ...........................................................16-7
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xiii
List of Figures (Concluded)
Page
Number
Title
Page
Number
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-9
Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by an External Interrupt......................... 17-5
Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by a RESET .......................................... 17-6
Input Timing for External Interrupts ........................................................................... 17-7
Input Timing for RESET ............................................................................................. 17-8
Serial Data Transfer Timing....................................................................................... 17-8
LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Timing .............................................................................. 17-9
Clock Timing Measurement at XIN ............................................................................. 17-11
Clock Timing Measurement at XTIN .......................................................................... 17-12
Operating Voltage Range .......................................................................................... 17-13
18-1
18-2
64-Pin QFP Package Dimensions (64-QFP-1420F) ................................................. 18-1
64-Pin LQFP Package Dimensions (64-LQFP-1010)................................................ 18-2
19-1
19-2
19-3
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-QFP-1420F) ............................... 19-2
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-LQFP-1010) ............................... 19-3
Operating Voltage Range .......................................................................................... 19-7
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+)................................................................... 20-2
TB8275/8/4 Target Board Configuration.................................................................... 20-3
40-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB8275/8/4 ....................................................... 20-7
S3E8270 Cables for 64-QFP Package ...................................................................... 20-7
xiv
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
List of Tables
Table
Number
Title
Page
Number
1-1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Descriptions ................. 1-6
2-1
2-2
S3C8275X Register Type Summary .......................................................................... 2-5
S3C8278X/C8274X Register Type Summary............................................................ 2-5
4-1
4-2
4-3
Set 1 Registers........................................................................................................... 4-1
Set 1, Bank 0 Registers.............................................................................................. 4-2
Set 1, Bank 1 Registers.............................................................................................. 4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
Interrupt Vectors......................................................................................................... 5-5
Interrupt Control Register Overview........................................................................... 5-6
Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers............................................................. 5-8
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
Instruction Group Summary ....................................................................................... 6-2
Flag Notation Conventions......................................................................................... 6-8
Instruction Set Symbols.............................................................................................. 6-8
Instruction Notation Conventions ............................................................................... 6-9
Opcode Quick Reference........................................................................................... 6-10
Condition Codes......................................................................................................... 6-12
8-1
8-2
8-3
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1 Register and Values After RESET ..................... 8-2
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values After RESET............... 8-3
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values After RESET............... 8-4
9-1
9-2
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Port Configuration Overview ....................................... 9-1
Port Data Register Summary ..................................................................................... 9-2
13-1
LCD Clock Signal Frame Frequency ......................................................................... 13-3
15-1
BLDCON Value and Detection Level ......................................................................... 15-2
16-1
16-2
ISP Sector Size .......................................................................................................... 16-6
Reset Vector Address ................................................................................................ 16-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xv
List of Tables (Continued)
Table
Number
Title
Page
Number
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-9
17-10
17-11
17-12
Absolute Maximum Ratings........................................................................................17-2
D.C. Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................................17-2
Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode ............................................................17-5
Input/Output Capacitance...........................................................................................17-6
A.C. Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................................17-7
Battery Level Detector Electrical Characteristics .......................................................17-9
LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Electrical Characteristics ..................................................17-9
Main Oscillation Characteristics .................................................................................17-10
Sub Oscillation Characteristics...................................................................................17-10
Main Oscillation Stabilization Time.............................................................................17-11
Sub Oscillation Stabilization Time ..............................................................................17-12
A.C. Electrical Characteristics for Internal Flash ROM ..............................................17-13
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-4
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash ROM..........................................19-4
Comparison of S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X and
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Features.......................................................................19-4
Operating Mode Selection Criteria .............................................................................19-5
D.C. Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................................19-6
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
Power Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4...................................................................20-4
Main-clock Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4............................................................20-4
Select Smart Option Source Setting for TB8275/8/4..................................................20-5
Smart Option Switch Settings for TB8275/8/4............................................................20-5
Device Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4..................................................................20-6
The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting..........................................................................20-6
xvi
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
List of Programming Tips
Description
Chapter 2:
Page
Number
Address Spaces
Using the Page Pointer for RAM Clear (Page 0, Page 1) ........................................................................ 2-9
Setting the Register Pointers .................................................................................................................... 2-13
Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers ................................................................. 2-14
Addressing the Common Working Register Area..................................................................................... 2-18
Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP ................................................................................. 2-23
Chapter 5:
Interrupt Structure
How to clear an interrupt pending bit........................................................................................................ 5-15
Chapter 7:
Clock Circuit
Switching the CPU Clock.......................................................................................................................... 7-7
Chapter 16:
Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Sector Erase ............................................................................................................................................. 16-8
Program .................................................................................................................................................... 16-10
Reading..................................................................................................................................................... 16-11
Hard Lock Protection ................................................................................................................................ 16-12
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xvii
List of Register Descriptions
Register
Identifier
BLDCON
BTCON
CLKCON
CLOCON
EXTICONH
EXTICONL
EXITPND
FLAGS
FMCON
FMSECH
FMSECL
FMUSR
IMR
IPH
IPL
IPR
IRQ
LCON
OSCCON
P0CONH
P0CONL
P0PUR
P1CONH
P1CONL
P1PUR
P2CONH
P2CONL
P2PUR
P3CONH
P3CONL
P3PUR
P4CONH
P4CONL
P5CONH
P5CONL
P6CON
PP
RP0
RP1
SIOCON
SPH
SPL
STPCON
SYM
TACON
TBCON
WTCON
Full Register Name
Page
Number
Battery Level Detector Control Register .................................................................... 4-5
Basic Timer Control Register ..................................................................................... 4-6
System Clock Control Register .................................................................................. 4-7
Clock Output Control Register ................................................................................... 4-8
External Interrupt Control Register (High Byte) ......................................................... 4-9
External Interrupt Control Register (Low Byte) .......................................................... 4-10
External Interrupt Pending Register ........................................................................... 4-11
System Flags Register ............................................................................................... 4-12
Flash Memory Control Register ................................................................................. 4-13
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (High Byte) ................................................. 4-14
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (Low Byte) .................................................. 4-14
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register .................................................. 4-15
Interrupt Mask Register .............................................................................................. 4-16
Instruction Pointer (High Byte) ................................................................................... 4-17
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) .................................................................................... 4-17
Interrupt Priority Register ........................................................................................... 4-18
Interrupt Request Register ......................................................................................... 4-19
LCD Control Register ................................................................................................. 4-20
Oscillator Control Register ......................................................................................... 4-21
Port 0 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-22
Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-23
Port 0 Pull-Up Control Register.................................................................................. 4-24
Port 1 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-25
Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-26
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register .................................................................................. 4-27
Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-28
Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-29
Port 2 Pull-up Control Register .................................................................................. 4-30
Port 3 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-31
Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-32
Port 3 Pull-up Control Register .................................................................................. 4-33
Port 4 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-34
Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-35
Port 5 Control Register (High Byte)............................................................................ 4-36
Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte) ............................................................................ 4-37
Port 6 Control Register............................................................................................... 4-38
Register Page Pointer ................................................................................................ 4-39
Register Pointer 0....................................................................................................... 4-40
Register Pointer 1....................................................................................................... 4-40
SIO Control Register .................................................................................................. 4-41
Stack Pointer (High Byte) ........................................................................................... 4-42
Stack Pointer (Low Byte)............................................................................................ 4-42
Stop Control Register ................................................................................................. 4-43
System Mode Register ............................................................................................... 4-44
Timer 1/A Control Register......................................................................................... 4-45
Timer B Control Register............................................................................................ 4-46
Watch Timer Control Register.................................................................................... 4-47
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xix
List of Instruction Descriptions
Instruction
Mnemonic
ADC
ADD
AND
BAND
BCP
BITC
BITR
BITS
BOR
BTJRF
BTJRT
BXOR
CALL
CCF
CLR
COM
CP
CPIJE
CPIJNE
DA
DEC
DECW
DI
DIV
DJNZ
EI
ENTER
EXIT
IDLE
INC
INCW
IRET
JP
JR
LD
LDB
Full Register Name
Page
Number
Add with Carry............................................................................................................ 6-14
Add ............................................................................................................................. 6-15
Logical AND ............................................................................................................... 6-16
Bit AND....................................................................................................................... 6-17
Bit Compare ............................................................................................................... 6-18
Bit Complement.......................................................................................................... 6-19
Bit Reset ..................................................................................................................... 6-20
Bit Set ......................................................................................................................... 6-21
Bit OR ......................................................................................................................... 6-22
Bit Test, Jump Relative on False ............................................................................... 6-23
Bit Test, Jump Relative on True................................................................................. 6-24
Bit XOR....................................................................................................................... 6-25
Call Procedure............................................................................................................ 6-26
Complement Carry Flag ............................................................................................. 6-27
Clear ........................................................................................................................... 6-28
Complement ............................................................................................................... 6-29
Compare..................................................................................................................... 6-30
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal ................................................................. 6-31
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal ......................................................... 6-32
Decimal Adjust ........................................................................................................... 6-33
Decrement.................................................................................................................. 6-35
Decrement Word ........................................................................................................ 6-36
Disable Interrupts ....................................................................................................... 6-37
Divide (Unsigned)....................................................................................................... 6-38
Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero.............................................................................. 6-39
Enable Interrupts ........................................................................................................ 6-40
Enter ........................................................................................................................... 6-41
Exit.............................................................................................................................. 6-42
Idle Operation............................................................................................................. 6-43
Increment ................................................................................................................... 6-44
Increment Word.......................................................................................................... 6-45
Interrupt Return .......................................................................................................... 6-46
Jump........................................................................................................................... 6-47
Jump Relative............................................................................................................. 6-48
Load............................................................................................................................ 6-49
Load Bit ...................................................................................................................... 6-51
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
xxi
List of Instruction Descriptions (Continued)
Instruction
Mnemonic
LDC/LDE
LDCD/LDED
LDCI/LDEI
LDCPD/LDEPD
LDCPI/LDEPI
LDW
MULT
NEXT
NOP
OR
POP
POPUD
POPUI
PUSH
PUSHUD
PUSHUI
RCF
RET
RL
RLC
RR
RRC
SB0
SB1
SBC
SCF
SRA
SRP/SRP0/SRP1
STOP
SUB
SWAP
TCM
TM
WFI
XOR
xxii
Full Register Name
Page
Number
Load Memory..............................................................................................................6-52
Load Memory and Decrement ....................................................................................6-54
Load Memory and Increment......................................................................................6-55
Load Memory with Pre-Decrement.............................................................................6-56
Load Memory with Pre-Increment ..............................................................................6-57
Load Word ..................................................................................................................6-58
Multiply (Unsigned) .....................................................................................................6-59
Next.............................................................................................................................6-60
No Operation ..............................................................................................................6-61
Logical OR ..................................................................................................................6-62
Pop from Stack ...........................................................................................................6-63
Pop User Stack (Decrementing).................................................................................6-64
Pop User Stack (Incrementing) ..................................................................................6-65
Push to Stack..............................................................................................................6-66
Push User Stack (Decrementing)...............................................................................6-67
Push User Stack (Incrementing) ................................................................................6-68
Reset Carry Flag.........................................................................................................6-69
Return .........................................................................................................................6-70
Rotate Left ..................................................................................................................6-71
Rotate Left through Carry ...........................................................................................6-72
Rotate Right................................................................................................................6-73
Rotate Right through Carry.........................................................................................6-74
Select Bank 0..............................................................................................................6-75
Select Bank 1..............................................................................................................6-76
Subtract with Carry .....................................................................................................6-77
Set Carry Flag.............................................................................................................6-78
Shift Right Arithmetic ..................................................................................................6-79
Set Register Pointer....................................................................................................6-80
Stop Operation............................................................................................................6-81
Subtract ......................................................................................................................6-82
Swap Nibbles..............................................................................................................6-83
Test Complement under Mask ...................................................................................6-84
Test under Mask .........................................................................................................6-85
Wait for Interrupt .........................................................................................................6-86
Logical Exclusive OR..................................................................................................6-87
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8-SERIES MICROCONTROLLERS
Samsung's S3C8 series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range
of integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. Among the major CPU features are:
•
Efficient register-oriented architecture
•
Selectable CPU clock sources
•
Idle and Stop power-down mode release by interrupt or reset
•
Built-in basic timer with watchdog function
A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more
interrupt sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to
specific interrupt levels.
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X MICROCONTROLLER
The S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X single-chip CMOS microcontrollers are fabricated
using the highly advanced CMOS process, based on Samsung's latest CPU architecture.
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X is a microcontroller with a 16/8/4K-byte mask-programmable ROM embedded.
The S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X is a microcontroller with a 16/8/4K-byte flash ROM embedded.
Using a proven modular design approach, Samsung engineers have successfully developed the
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X by integrating the following peripheral modules with the
powerful SAM8 core:
•
Seven programmable I/O ports, including six 8-bit ports and one 4-bit port, for a total of 52 pins.
•
Eight bit-programmable pins for external interrupts.
•
One 8-bit basic timer for oscillation stabilization and watchdog function (system reset).
•
Two 8-bit timer/counter with selectable operating modes.
•
Watch timer for real time
FLASH
The S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X are FLASH version of the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller. The
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X microcontroller has an on-chip FLASH ROM instead of a masked ROM. The
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X is comparable to the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X, both in function and in pin
configuration. The S3F8275X only is a full flash. The full flash means that data can be written into the program
ROM by an instruction.
1-1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
FEATURES
CPU
Watch Timer
• SAM88RC CPU core
Memory
•
•
Program Memory(ROM)
- 16K×8 bits program
memory(S3C8275X/F8275X)
- 8K×8 bits program
memory(S3C8278X/F8278X)
- 4K×8 bits program
memory(S3C8274X/F8274X)
- Internal flash memory(Program memory)
√ Sector size: 128 Bytes
√ 10 Years data retention
√ Fast programming time:
+ Chip erase: 50ms
+ Sector erase: 10ms
+ Byte program: 30us
√ User programmable by ‘LDC’ instruction
√ Endurance: 10,000 erase/program cycles
√ Sector(128-bytes) erase available
√ Byte programmable
√ External serial programming support
√ Expandable OBPTM(On board program)
sector
• Data Memory (RAM)
- Including LCD display data memory
- 544 × 8 bits data memory(S3C8275X/F8275X)
- 288 × 8 bits data memory(S3C8278X/F8278X)
- 288 × 8 bits data memory(S3C8274X/F8274X)
Instruction Set
•
•
78 instructions
Idle and Stop instructions added for power-down
modes
52 I/O Pins
•
LCD Controller/Driver
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Criteria voltage: 2.2V
En/Disable by smart option (ROM address: 3FH)
Two Power-Down Modes
•
•
Idle: only CPU clock stops
Stop: selected system clock and CPU clock stop
Oscillation Sources
•
•
•
Crystal, ceramic, or RC for main clock
Main clock frequency: 0.4 MHz − 8 MHz
32.768 kHz crystal for sub clock
Instruction Execution Times
•
500nS at 8 MHz fx(minimum)
Operating Voltage Range
•
1-2
3-criteria voltage selectable (2.2V, 2.4V, 2.8V)
En/Disable by software for current consumption
source
Low Voltage Reset (LVR)
• 8 interrupt levels and 12 interrupt sources
• Fast interrupt processing feature
8-Bit Basic Timer
Programmable interval timer
External event counter function
Configurable as one 16-bit timer/counters
8-bit transmit/receive mode
8-bit receive mode
LSB-first or MSB-first transmission selectable
Internal or External clock source
Battery Level Detector
•
•
•
•
•
32 segments and 4 common terminals
Static, 1/2 duty, 1/3 duty, and 1/4 duty selectable
Internal resistor circuit for LCD bias
8-bit Serial I/O Interface
• I/O: 16 pins
• I/O: 36 pins (Sharing with LCD signal outputs)
Interrupts
• Watchdog timer function
• 4 kinds of clock source
Two 8-Bit Timer/Counters
Interval time: 3.91mS, 0.25S, 0.5S, and 1S
at 32.768 kHz
0.5/1/2/4 kHz Selectable buzzer output
2.0 V to 3.6 V at 0.4 − 4.2 MHz
2.5 V to 3.6 V at 0.4 − 8.0 MHz
Operating Temperature Range
−25 °C to +85 °C
Package Type
•
64-QFP-1420F, 64-LQFP-1010
Smart Option
•
•
Low Voltage Reset(LVR) level and
enable/disable are at your hardwired option
(ROM address 3FH)
ISP related option selectable
(ROM address 3EH)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
BLOCK DIAGRAM
TAOUT/P0.4
T1CLK/P0.3
TBOUT/P0.5
8-Bit Timer/
Counter A
8-Bit Timer/
Counter B
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/T1CLK
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.7/BUZ
16-Bit
Timer/
Counter 1
XIN
nRESET XTIN
XOUT
XTOUT
VREG
Watchdog
Timer
Basic Timer
Low Voltage
Reset
Port I/O and Interrupt Control
I/O Port 0
Clock Out
Block
CLKOUT/P0.6
Battery Level
Detector
VBLDREF/
P2.0/SEG31
Watch Timer
BUZ/P0.7
COM0-COM3/P6.0-P6.3
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
P1.3/INT3
P1.4/INT4
P1.5/INT5
P1.6/INT6
P1.7/INT7
SEG8-SEG15/P4.7-P4.0
LCD
Driver
I/O Port 1
SEG16-SEG23/P3.7-P3.0
SEG24-SEG30/P2.7-P2.1
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
544/288 Byte
Register File
P2.0/SEG31/VBLDREF
SEG0-SEG7/P5.7-P5.0
SAM88RC CPU
VLC0-VLC2
16/8/4-Kbyte
ROM
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
I/O Port 2
SIO
P3.0-P3.7/SEG23-SEG16
I/O Port 3
I/O Port 6
P6.0-P6.3/
COM0-COM3
I/O Port 5
P4.0-P4.7/SEG15-SEG8
I/O Port 4
P5.0-P5.7/
SEG7-SEG0
P2.1-P2.7/SEG30-SEG24
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram
1-3
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
SEG1/P5.6
SEG2/P5.5
SEG3/P5.4
SEG4/P5.3
SEG5/P5.2
SEG6/P5.1
SEG7/P5.0
SEG8/P4.7
SEG9/P4.6
SEG10/P4.5
SEG11/P4.4
SEG12/P4.3
SEG13/P4.2
PIN ASSIGNMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
S3C8275X/F8275X
S3C8278X/F8278X
S3C8274X/F8274X
(64-QFP-1420F)
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SEG14/P4.1
SEG15/P4.0
SEG16/P3.7
SEG17/P3.6
SEG18/P3.5
SEG19/P3.4
SEG20/P3.3
SEG21/P3.2
SEG22/P3.1
SEG23/P3.0
SEG24/P2.7
SEG25/P2.6
SEG26/P2.5
SEG27/P2.4
SEG28/P2.3
SEG29/P2.2
SEG30/P2.1
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
P1.7/INT7
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/T1CLK
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.7/BUZ
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
P1.3/INT3
P1.4/INT4
P1.5/INT5
P1.6/INT6
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SEG0/P5.7
COM0/P6.0
COM1/P6.1
COM2/P6.2
COM3/P6.3
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VDD
VSS
XOUT
XIN
TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
nRESET
VREG
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
Figure 1-2. S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-QFP-1420F)
1-4
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
SEG1/P5.6
SEG2/P5.5
SEG3/P5.4
SEG4/P5.3
SEG5/P5.2
SEG6/P5.1
SEG7/P5.0
SEG8/P4.7
SEG9/P4.6
SEG10/P4.5
SEG11/P4.4
SEG12/P4.3
SEG13/P4.2
SEG14/P4.1
SEG15/P4.0
SEG16/P3.7
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
S3C8275X/F8275X
S3C8278X/F8278X
S3C8274X/F8274X
(64-LQFP-1010)
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SEG17/P3.6
SEG18/P3.5
SEG19/P3.4
SEG20/P3.3
SEG21/P3.2
SEG22/P3.1
SEG23/P3.0
SEG24/P2.7
SEG25/P2.6
SEG26/P2.5
SEG27/P2.4
SEG28/P2.3
SEG29/P2.2
SEG30/P2.1
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
P1.7/INT7
VREG
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/T1CLK
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.7/BUZ
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
P1.3/INT3
P1.4/INT4
P1.5/INT5
P1.6/INT6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SEG0/P5.7
COM0/P6.0
COM1/P6.1
COM2/P6.2
COM3/P6.3
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VDD
VSS
XOUT
XIN
TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
nRESET
Figure 1-3. S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-LQFP-1010)
1-5
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Table 1-1. S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Descriptions
Pin
Names
Pin
Type
Pin
Description
Circuit
Type
Pin
No.
Shared
Functions
P0.0−P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
I/O
I/O port with bit-programmable pins;
Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain
output and software assignable pull-ups;
P0.0−P0.2 are alternately used for external
interrupt input(noise filters, interrupt enable
and pending control).
E-4
18−20
21
22
23
24
25
INT0−INT2
T1CLK
TAOUT
TBOUT
CLKOUT
BUZ
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3−P1.7
I/O
I/O port with bit-programmable pins;
Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain
output and software assignable pull-ups;
P1.3−P1.7 are alternately used for external
interrupt input(noise filters, interrupt enable
and pending control).
E-4
26
27
28
29−33
SCK
SO
SI
INT3−INT7
P2.0
P2.1−P2.7
I/O
I/O port with bit-programmable pins;
Input or push-pull, open-drain output and
software assignable pull-ups.
H-10
H-8
34
35−41
SEG31/VBLDREF
SEG30−SEG24
P3.0−P3.7
I/O
I/O port with bit-programmable pins;
Input or push-pull, open-drain output and
software assignable pull-ups.
H-8
42−49
SEG23−SEG16
P4.0−P4.7
P5.0−P5.7
P6.0−P6.3
I/O
I/O port with bit-programmable pins;
Input or push-pull output and software
assignable pull-ups.
H-9
50−57
58−64, 1
2−5
SEG15−SEG8
SEG7−SEG0
COM0−COM3
1-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Table 1-1. S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin
Names
VLC0−VLC2
Pin
Type
−
Pin
Description
LCD power supply pins.
Circuit
Type
Pin
No.
Shared
Functions
−
6−8
−
INT0−INT2
INT3−INT7
I/O
External interrupts input pins.
E-4
18−20
29−33
P0.0−P0.2
P1.3−P1.7
T1CLK
I/O
Timer 1/A external clock input.
E-4
21
P0.3
TAOUT
I/O
Timer 1/A clock output.
E-4
22
P0.4
TBOUT
I/O
Timer B clock output.
E-4
23
P0.5
CLKOUT
I/O
System clock output.
E-4
24
P0.6
BUZ
I/O
Output pin for buzzer signal.
E-4
25
P0.7
SCK, SO, SI
I/O
Serial clock, data output, and data input.
E-4
26,27,28
P1.0, P1.1, P1.2
COM0–COM3
I/O
LCD common signal outputs.
H-9
2−5
P6.0−P6.3
SEG0–SEG15
SEG16–SEG30
SEG31
I/O
LCD segment signal outputs.
H-9
H-8
H-10
1,64− 50
49−35
34
P5.7−P4.0
P3.7−P2.1
P2.0/VBLDREF
VBLDREF
I/O
Battery level detector reference voltage
H-10
34
P2.0/SEG31
VREG
O
Regulator voltage output for sub clock
(needed 0.1uF)
−
17
−
nRESET
I
System reset pin
B
16
−
XTIN, XTOUT
−
Sub oscillator pins
−
14, 15
−
XIN, XOUT
−
Main oscillator pins.
−
12, 11
−
TEST
I
Test input: it must be connected to VSS
−
13
−
VDD, VSS
−
Power input pins
−
9, 10
−
1-7
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PIN CIRCUITS
VDD
VDD
Pull-Up
Resistor
P-Channel
In
In
N-Channel
Schmitt Trigger
Figure 1-5. Pin Circuit Type B (nRESET)
Figure 1-4. Pin Circuit Type A
VDD
VDD
Pull-up
Resistor
Resistor
Enable
Open
Drain
P-CH
I/O
Data
N-CH
Output
Disable
Schmitt Trigger
Figure 1-6. Pin Circuit Type E-4 (P0, P1)
1-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
VLC0
VLC1
COM/SEG
Out
Output
Disable
VLC2
VSS
Figure 1-7. Pin Circuit Type H-4
VDD
VDD
Pull-Up
Resistor
Resistor
Enable
Open Drain
P-CH
Data
I/O
Output
Disable 1
N-CH
SEG
Output
Disable 2
Circuit
Type H-4
Figure 1-8. Pin Circuit Type H-8 (P2.1– P2.7, P3)
1-9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
VDD
VDD
Pull-Up
Resistor
Resistor
Enable
P-CH
Data
I/O
Output
Disable 1
N-CH
COM/SEG
Output
Disable 2
Circuit
Type H-4
Figure 1-9. Pin Circuit Type H-9 (P4, P5, P6)
1-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
VDD
VDD
Pull-Up
Resistor
Resistor
Enable
Open-Drain
P-CH
Data
I/O
Output
Disable 1
SEG
Alternative
Function
N-CH
Circuit
Type H-4
BLDEN
BLD Select
To BLD
Figure 1-10. Pin Circuit Type H-10 (P2.0)
1-11
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
2
ADDRESS SPACES
ADDRESS SPACES
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller has two types of address space:
•
Internal program memory (ROM)
•
Internal register file
A 16-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and
data between the CPU and the register file.
The S3C8275X has an internal 16-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM. The S3C8278X has an internal 8-Kbyte
mask-programmable ROM. The S3C8274X has an internal 4-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM.
The 256-byte physical register space is expanded into an addressable area of 320 bytes using addressing
modes.
A 16-byte LCD display register file is implemented.
There are 605 mapped registers in the internal register file. Of these, 528 are for general-purpose.
(This number includes a 16-byte working register common area used as a “scratch area” for data operations, two
192-byte prime register areas, and two 64-byte areas (Set 2)). Thirteen 8-bit registers are used for the CPU and
the system control, and 48 registers are mapped for peripheral controls and data registers. Nineteen register
locations are not mapped.
2-1
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Program memory (ROM) stores program codes or table data. The S3C8275X has 16K bytes internal maskprogrammable program memory, the S3C8278X has 8K bytes, the S3C8274X has 4K bytes.
The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H–0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations in this
address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the vector address area to store a program
code, be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these locations.
The ROM address at which a program execution starts after a reset is 0100H.
The reset address of ROM can be changed by a smart option only in the S3F8275X (Full-Flash Device). Refer to
the chapter 16. Embedded Flash Memory Interface for more detail contents.
(Decimal)
(HEX)
3FFFH
16,383
(Decimal)
(HEX)
1FFFH
8,191
16K-bytes
Internal
Program
Memory
Area
(Decimal)
8K-bytes
Internal
Program
Memory
Area
255
FFH
255
FFH
Smart Option Area
3CH
3CH
S3C8275X/F8275X
00H
0
S3C8278X/F8278X
Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space
2-2
3FH
Smart Option Area
00H
FFH
Interrupt Vector Area
3FH
3FH
Smart Option Area
0
255
Interrupt Vector Area
Interrupt Vector Area
0FFFH
4K-bytes
Internal
Program
Memory
Area
8FFH
Available
ISP Sector Area
(HEX)
4,095
3CH
00H
0
S3C8274X/F8274X
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
SMART OPTION
ROM Address: 003EH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
ISP reset vector address selection bit:
00 = 200H (ISP area size: 256 byte)
01 = 300H (ISP area size: 512 byte)
10 = 500H (ISP area size: 1024 byte)
11 = 900H (ISP area size: 2048 byte)
LSB
ISP protection size selection: (note)
00 = 256 bytes
01 = 512 bytes
10 = 1024 bytes
11 = 2048 bytes
Not used
ISP reset vector change enable/disable bit:
0 = OBP reset vector address
1 = Normal vector (address 0100H)
.0
ISP protection enable/disable bit:
0 = Enable (not erasable by LDC)
1 = Disable (erasable by LDC)
ROM Address: 003FH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
Not used
.0
LSB
LVR enable/disable bit
(criteria voltage: 2.2V):
0 = Disable LVR
1 = Enable LVR
These bits should be
always logic "110b".
ROM Address: 003CH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
ROM Address: 003DH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
Not used
NOTES:
1. After selecting ISP reset vector address in selecting ISP protection size, don't select upper than ISP
area size.
2. When any values are written in the Smart Option area (003CH-003FH) by LDC instruction, the data of
the area may be changed but the Smart Option is not affected. The data for Smart Option should be
written in the Smart Option area (003CH-003FH) by OTP/MTP tools (SPW2 plus single
programmer, or GW-PRO2 gang programmer).
Figure 2-2. Smart Option
2-3
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Smart option is the ROM option for start condition of the chip. The ROM address used by smart option is from
003CH to 003FH.
The ISP of smart option (003EH) is available in the S3F8275X only. The default value of ROM address 003EH is
FFH. And ROM address 003EH should be kept FFH when used the
S3C8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X.
The LVR of smart option (003FH) is available in all the device,
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X. The default value of ROM address 003FH is FFH.
2-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ARCHITECTURE
In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X implementation, the upper 64-byte area of register files is expanded two
64-byte areas, called set 1 and set 2. The upper 32-byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32-byte register
banks (bank 0 and bank 1), and the lower 32-byte area is a single 32-byte common area.
In case of S3C8275X the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 605. Of these 605 registers, 13 bytes are
for CPU and system control registers, 16 bytes are for LCD data registers, 48 bytes are for peripheral control and
data registers, 16 bytes are used as a shared working registers, and 512 registers are for general-purpose use,
page 0-page 1 (in case of S3C8278X/C8274X, page 0).
You can always address set 1 register locations, regardless of which of the two register pages is currently
selected. Set 1 locations, however, can only be addressed using register addressing modes.
The extension of register space into separately addressable areas (sets, banks, and pages) is supported by
various addressing mode restrictions, the select bank instructions, SB0 and SB1, and the register page pointer
(PP).
Specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the register file are summarized in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1. S3C8275X Register Type Summary
Register Type
Number of Bytes
General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte
common working register area, two 192-byte prime
register area, and two 64-byte set 2 area)
LCD data registers
CPU and system control registers
Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers
528
Total Addressable Bytes
605
16
13
48
Table 2-2. S3C8278X/C8274X Register Type Summary
Register Type
Number of Bytes
General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte
common working register area, one 192-byte prime
register area, and one 64-byte set 2 area)
LCD data registers
CPU and system control registers
Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers
272
Total Addressable Bytes
349
16
13
48
2-5
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Set1
FFH
Bank 1
FFH
64
Bytes
FFH
Bank
0 and
System
Peripheral Control
System
and
Registers
Peripheral Control
Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
32
Bytes
E0H
DFH
Page 0
Set 2
General-Purpose
Data Registers
E0H
(Indirect Register, Indexed
Mode, and Stack
Operations)
System Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
D0H
CFH
Page 1
256
Bytes
C0H
BFH
General Purpose Register
(Register Addressing Mode)
Page 0
C0H
Page 2
~
0FH
192
Bytes
Prime
Data Registers
16
Bytes
~
~
Prime
Data Registers
(All Addressing Modes)
~
(All addressing modes)
LCD Display Reigster
00H
00H
Figure 2-3. Internal Register File Organization (S3C8275X)
2-6
~
~
~
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
Set1
Bank 1
FFH
E0H
64
Bytes
FFH
Bank
0 and
System
Peripheral Control
System
and
Registers
Peripheral Control
Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
32
Bytes
DFH
Page 0
Set 2
General-Purpose
Data Registers
E0H
(Indirect Register, Indexed
Mode, and Stack
Operations)
System Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
D0H
CFH
C0H
BFH
General Purpose Register
(Register Addressing Mode)
256
Bytes
Page 0
C0H
Page 2
~
0FH
192
Bytes
Prime
Data Registers
16
Bytes
~
~
Prime
Data Registers
~
(All Addressing Modes)
~
(All addressing modes)
LCD Display Reigster
00H
NOTE:
00H
In case of S3C8278X/C8274X, there are page 0 and page 2.
Page 2 is for LCD display register, 16 bytes.
Figure 2-4. Internal Register File Organization (S3C8278X/C8274X)
2-7
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
REGISTER PAGE POINTER (PP)
The S3C8-series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 256-byte internal register file (using
an 8-bit data bus) into as many as 16 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled by
the register page pointer (PP, DFH). In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller, a paged register file
expansion is implemented for LCD data registers, and the register page pointer must be changed to address
other pages.
After a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and the destination value (upper nibble) are always
"0000", automatically selecting page 0 as the source and destination page for register addressing.
Register Page Pointer (PP)
DFH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Source register page selection bits:
0000
0001
0010
others
Source: Page 0
Source: Page 1 (Not used for the S3C8278X/C8274X)
Source: Page 2
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Destination register page selection bits:
0000
0001
0010
others
Destination: Page 0
Destination: Page 1 (Not used for the S3C8278X/C8274X)
Destination: Page 2
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
NOTES:
1. In the S3C8275X microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as three pages (Pages 0-2).
The pages 0-1 are used for general purpose register file, and page 2 is used for LCD data register or
general purpose register.
2. In the S3C8278X/C8274X microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as two pages (Pages 0, 2).
The page 0 is used for general purpose register file, and page 2 is used for LCD data register or general
purpose register.
3. A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and source values shown above to the register page
pointer. These values should be modified to address other pages.
Figure 2-5. Register Page Pointer (PP)
2-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Page Pointer for RAM Clear (Page 0, Page 1)
RAMCL0
RAMCL1
; Destination ← 0, Source ← 0
LD
PP,#00H
SRP
#0C0H
LD
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
R0,#0FFH
@R0
R0,RAMCL0
@R0
; R0 = 00H
LD
PP,#10H
; Destination ← 1, Source ← 0
LD
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
R0,#0FFH
@R0
R0,RAMCL1
@R0
; Page 1 RAM clear starts
; Page 0 RAM clear starts
; R0 = 00H
NOTE: You should refer to page 6-39 and use DJNZ instruction properly when DJNZ instruction is used in your program.
2-9
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
REGISTER SET 1
The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H–FFH.
The upper 32-byte area of this 64-byte space (E0H–FFH) is expanded two 32-byte register banks, bank 0 and
bank 1. The set register bank instructions, SB0 or SB1, are used to address one bank or the other. A hardware
reset operation always selects bank 0 addressing.
The upper two 32-byte areas (bank 0 and bank 1) of set 1 (E0H–FFH) contains 48 mapped system and
peripheral control registers. The lower 32-byte area contains 16 system registers (D0H–DFH) and a 16-byte
common working register area (C0H–CFH). You can use the common working register area as a “scratch” area
for data operations being performed in other areas of the register file.
Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using Register addressing mode. The 16-byte
working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing (For more information about
working register addressing, please refer to Chapter 3, “Addressing Modes.”)
REGISTER SET 2
The same 64-byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H–FFH is logically duplicated to add another
64 bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. For the S3C8275X,
the set 2 address range (C0H–FFH) is accessible on pages 0–1.
S3C8278X/C8274X, the set 2 address range (C0H–FFH) is accessible on page 0.
The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions. You can use only
Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations. In order to access registers in set 2, you must use Register
Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode.
The set 2 register area is commonly used for stack operations.
2-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
PRIME REGISTER SPACE
The lower 192 bytes (00H–BFH) of the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X's two or one 256-byte register pages is
called prime register area. Prime registers can be accessed using any of the seven addressing modes
(see Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.")
The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset. In order to address prime
registers on pages 0, 1, or 2 you must set the register page pointer (PP) to the appropriate source and destination
values.
FFH
Set 1
Bank 0
Bank 1
FFH
FFH
Page 1
Page 0
Set 2
Set 2
FCH
E0H
D0H
C0H
BFH
C0H
Page 0
Prime
Space
CPU and system control
Page 2
0FH
General-purpose
LCD Data
Register Area
Peripheral and I/O
LCD data register
NOTE:
00H
00H
In case of S3C8278X/C8274X, there are page 0 and page 2. Page 2 is for LCD display
register, 16 bytes.
Figure 2-6. Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map
2-11
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
WORKING REGISTERS
Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields.
When 4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256-byte register file can be seen by the programmer as one
that consists of 32 8-byte register groups or "slices." Each slice comprises of eight 8-bit registers.
Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to
form a 16-byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16-byte register block
anywhere in the addressable register file, except the set 2 area.
The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected
working register spaces:
— One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers, R0–R7 or R8–R15)
— One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers, R0–R15)
All the registers in an 8-byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant
address bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file.
The base addresses for the two selected 8-byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1.
After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16-byte common area in set 1 (C0H–CFH).
FFH
F8H
F7H
F0H
Slice 32
Slice 31
1 1 1 1 1 X X X
Set 1
Only
RP1 (Registers R8-R15)
Each register pointer points to
one 8-byte slice of the register
space, selecting a total 16-byte
working register block.
CFH
C0H
~
~
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP0 (Registers R0-R7)
Slice 2
Slice 1
Figure 2-7. 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)
2-12
10H
FH
8H
7H
0H
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
USING THE REGISTER POINTS
Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable
8-byte working register slices in the register file. After a reset, they point to the working register common area:
RP0 points to addresses C0H–C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H–CFH.
To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and/or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction.
(see Figures 2-8 and 2-9).
With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently
pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in
set 2, C0H–FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed
addressing modes.
The selected 16-byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8-byte slices. As a general
programming guideline, it is recommended that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice
(see Figure 2-8). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (noncontiguous) areas of the register file. In Figure 2-9, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice.
Because a register pointer can point to either of the two 8-byte slices in the working register block, you can
flexibly define the working register area to support program requirements.
PROGRAMMING TIP — Setting the Register Pointers
SRP
SRP1
SRP0
CLR
LD
#70H
#48H
#0A0H
RP0
RP1,#0F8H
;
;
;
;
;
RP0
RP0
RP0
RP0
RP0
←
←
←
←
←
70H, RP1 ← 78H
no change, RP1 ← 48H,
A0H, RP1 ← no change
00H, RP1 ← no change
no change, RP1 ← 0F8H
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
0 0 0 0 1 X X X
FH (R15)
8-Byte Slice
RP1
8H
7H
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
8-Byte Slice
0H (R0)
16-Byte
Contiguous
Working
Register block
RP0
Figure 2-8. Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
2-13
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
F7H (R7)
8-Byte Slice
F0H (R0)
1 1 1 1 0
X X X
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
X X X
8-Byte Slice
16-Byte
Contiguous
working
Register block
RP0
7H (R15)
0 0 0 0 0
0H (R0)
RP1
Figure 2-9. Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers
Calculate the sum of registers 80H–85H using the register pointer. The register addresses from 80H through 85H
contain the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15H respectively:
SRP0
#80H
; RP0 ← 80H
ADD
R0,R1
; R0 ← R0 + R1
ADC
R0,R2
; R0 ← R0 + R2 + C
ADC
R0,R3
; R0 ← R0 + R3 + C
ADC
R0,R4
; R0 ← R0 + R4 + C
ADC
R0,R5
; R0 ← R0 + R5 + C
The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used in this
example takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the register pointer is not used to
calculate the sum of these registers, the following instruction sequence would have to be used:
ADD
80H,81H
; 80H ← (80H) + (81H)
ADC
80H,82H
; 80H ← (80H) + (82H) + C
ADC
80H,83H
; 80H ← (80H) + (83H) + C
ADC
80H,84H
; 80H ← (80H) + (84H) + C
ADC
80H,85H
; 80H ← (80H) + (85H) + C
Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string takes 15 bytes of
instruction code rather than 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles rather than 36 cycles.
2-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ADDRESSING
The S3C8-series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full
advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time.
With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register
pair, you can access any location in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a
register pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that
space.
Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register
pair, the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always
an odd number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register, and
the least significant byte is always stored in the next (+1) odd-numbered register.
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing as it uses a register pointer to identify a specific
8-byte working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space.
MSB
LSB
Rn
Rn+1
n = Even address
Figure 2-10. 16-Bit Register Pair
2-15
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Special-Purpose Registers
Bank 1
General-Purpose Register
Bank 0
FFH
FFH
Control
Registers
E0H
Set 2
System
Registers
D0H
CFH
C0H
C0H
BFH
RP1
Register
Pointers
RP0
Each register pointer (RP) can independently point
to one of the 24 8-byte "slices" of the register file
(other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to
locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H-CFH
(that is, to the common working register area).
NOTE:
Prime
Registers
LCD Data
Registers
In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller,
pages 0-2 are implemented.
Pages 0-2 contain all of the addressable
registers in the internal register file.
00H
Page 0
Register Addressing Only
All
Addressing
Modes
Can be Pointed by Register Pointer
Figure 2-11. Register File Addressing
2-16
Page 0
Indirect Register,
All
Indexed
Addressing
Addressing
Modes
Modes
Can be Pointed to
By register Pointer
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
COMMON WORKING REGISTER AREA (C0H–CFH)
After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8-byte register slices in set 1, locations
C0H–CFH, as the active 16-byte working register block:
RP0 → C0H–C7H
RP1 → C8H–CFH
This 16-byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working
registers by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working
registers serve as temporary buffers for data operations between different pages.
FFH
Set 1
FFH
FFH
Page 1
Page 0
Set 2
FCH
Set 2
E0H
D0H
C0H
BFH
C0H
Following a hardware reset, register
pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the
common working register area,
locations C0H-CFH.
RP0 =
1100
0000
RP1 =
1100
1000
NOTE:
Page 0
~
Prime
Space
~
~
Page 2
0FH
LCD Data
Registers
00H
00H
In case of S3C8278X/C8274X, there are page 0 and page 2.
Page 2 is for LCD display register, 16 bytes.
Figure 2-12. Common Working Register Area
2-17
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PROGRAMMING TIP — Addressing the Common Working Register Area
As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H–CFH,
using working register addressing mode only.
Examples
1. LD
0C2H,40H
; Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
#0C0H
LD
R2,40H
; R2 (C2H) → the value in location 40H
0C3H,#45H
; Invalid addressing mode!
2. ADD
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
#0C0H
ADD
R3,#45H
; R3 (C3H) → R3 + 45H
4-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
Each register pointer defines a movable 8-byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in
a register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working
registers very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected
working register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address:
— The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0, "1" selects RP1).
— The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8-byte slice of the register space.
— The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice.
As shown in Figure 2-13, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are
concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as
the address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to
an address in the same 8-byte register slice.
Figure 2-14 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction
"INC R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the
three low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B).
2-18
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
OPCODE
4-bit address
provides three
low-order bits
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
Together they create an
8-bit register address
Figure 2-13. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing
RP0
0 1 1 1 0
RP1
0 0 0
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
Selects RP0
0 1 1 1 0
1 1 0
Register
address
(76H)
R6
OPCODE
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0
Instruction
'INC R6'
Figure 2-14. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-19
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
8-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To
initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value
"1100B." This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working
register addressing.
As shown in Figure 2-15, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit
addressing: Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address; the
three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction.
Figure 2-16 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction
address (1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 4 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in
RP1 (10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register
address (011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five address bits from
RP1 and the three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address,
0ABH (10101011B).
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
These address
bits indicate 8-bit
working register
addressing
1
1
0
0
8-bit logical
address
Three low-order bits
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
8-bit physical address
Figure 2-15. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing
2-20
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RP1
RP0
0 1 1 0 0
ADDRESS SPACES
0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1
Selects RP1
R11
1 1 0 0
1
0 1 1
8-bit address
form instruction
'LD R11, R2'
Register
address
(0ABH)
Specifies working
register addressing
Figure 2-16. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-21
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SYSTEM AND USER STACK
The S3C8-series microcontrollers use the system stack for data storage, subroutine calls and returns. The PUSH
and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X architecture
supports stack operations in the internal register file.
Stack Operations
Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts, and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are
saved to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents
of the PC and the FLAGS register are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to
their original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and
increased by one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top
of the stack, as shown in Figure 2-17.
High Address
PCL
PCL
Top of
stack
PCH
PCH
Top of
stack
Stack contents
after a call
instruction
Flags
Stack contents
after an
interrupt
Low Address
Figure 2-17. Stack Operations
User-Defined Stacks
You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI,
PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations.
Stack Pointers (SPL, SPH)
Register locations D8H and D9H contain the 16-bit stack pointer (SP) that is used for system stack operations.
The most significant byte of the SP address, SP15–SP8, is stored in the SPH register (D8H), and the least
significant byte, SP7–SP0, is stored in the SPL register (D9H). After a reset, the SP value is undetermined.
Because only internal memory space is implemented in the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X, the SPL must be
initialized to an 8-bit value in the range 00H–FFH. The SPH register is not needed and can be used as a generalpurpose register, if necessary.
When the SPL register contains the only stack pointer value (that is, when it points to a system stack in the
register file), you can use the SPH register as a general-purpose data register. However, if an overflow or
underflow condition occurs as a result of increasing or decreasing the stack address value in the SPL register
during normal stack operations, the value in the SPL register will overflow (or underflow) to the SPH register,
overwriting any other data that is currently stored there. To avoid overwriting data in the SPH register, you can
initialize the SPL value to "FFH" instead of "00H".
2-22
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESS SPACES
Programming TIP — Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP
The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using PUSH and
POP instructions:
SPL,#0FFH
; SPL ← FFH
; (Normally, the SPL is set to 0FFH by the initialization
; routine)
PUSH
PP
; Stack address 0FEH ← PP
PUSH
RP0
; Stack address 0FDH ← RP0
PUSH
RP1
; Stack address 0FCH ← RP1
PUSH
R3
; Stack address 0FBH ← R3
POP
R3
; R3 ← Stack address 0FBH
POP
RP1
; RP1 ← Stack address 0FCH
POP
RP0
; RP0 ← Stack address 0FDH
POP
PP
; PP ← Stack address 0FEH
LD
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-23
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
3
ADDRESSING MODES
ADDRESSING MODES
OVERVIEW
Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions
indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to
determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition
codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory.
The S3C8-series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are
available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are:
•
Register (R)
•
Indirect Register (IR)
•
Indexed (X)
•
Direct Address (DA)
•
Indirect Address (IA)
•
Relative Address (RA)
•
Immediate (IM)
3-1
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (R)
In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair
(see Figure 3-1).
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8-byte
working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2).
Program Memory
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Register File
Point to One
Register in Register
File
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
DEC
CNTR
;
Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-1. Register Addressing
Register File
MSB Point to
RP0 ot RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start
of working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit
Working Register
dst
3 LSBs
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
Two-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
OPERAND
Sample Instruction:
ADD
R1, R2
;
Where R1 and R2 are registers in the currently
selected working register area.
Figure 3-2. Working Register Addressing
3-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (IR)
In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the
operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to
program memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figures 3-3 through 3-6).
You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to
indirectly address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in
set 1 using the Indirect Register addressing mode.
Program Memory
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Register File
Point to One
Register in Register
File
ADDRESS
Address of Operand
used by Instruction
Value used in
Instruction Execution
OPERAND
Sample Instruction:
RL
@SHIFT
;
Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-3. Indirect Register Addressing to Register File
3-3
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
Program Memory
Example
Instruction
References
Program
Memory
dst
OPCODE
REGISTER
PAIR
Points to
Register Pair
Program Memory
Sample Instructions:
CALL
JP
@RR2
@RR2
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
Figure 3-4. Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory
3-4
16-Bit
Address
Points to
Program
Memory
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Program Memory
4-bit
Working
Register
Address
dst
src
OPCODE
~
~
3 LSBs
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
ADDRESS
~
Sample Instruction:
OR
R3, @R6
Value used in
Instruction
Selected
RP points
to start fo
working register
block
~
OPERAND
Figure 3-5. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File
3-5
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
Example Instruction
References either
Program Memory or
Data Memory
dst
src
OPCODE
Next 2-bit Point
to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
LSB Selects
Value used in
Instruction
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
points to
program
memory
or data
memory
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
LCD
LDE
LDE
R5,@RR6
R3,@RR14
@RR4, R8
; Program memory access
; External data memory access
; External data memory access
Figure 3-6. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (X)
Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to
calculate the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access
locations in the internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access
locations C0H–FFH in set 1 using Indexed addressing mode.
In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range –128
to +127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.)
For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained
in a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair
designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address
(see Figure 3-9).
The only instruction that supports Indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction
(LD). The LDC and LDE instructions support Indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for
external data memory, when implemented.
Register File
RP0 or RP1
~
Value used in
Instruction
+
Program Memory
Two-Operand
Instruction
Example
Base Address
dst/src
x
3 LSBs
Point to One of the
Woking Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
~
Selected RP
points to
start of
working
register
block
OPERAND
~
~
INDEX
Sample Instruction:
LD
R0, #BASE[R1]
;
Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value
Figure 3-7. Indexed Addressing to Register File
3-7
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
~
~
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
OFFSET
dst/src
x
OPCODE
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
NEXT 2 Bits
Point to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
16-Bits
16-Bits
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R4, #04H[RR2]
LDE
R4,#04H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-8. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset
3-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Program Memory
~
~
OFFSET
4-bit Working
Register Address
OFFSET
src
dst/src
OPCODE
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
NEXT 2 Bits
Point to Working
Register Pair
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
16-Bits
16-Bits
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R4, #1000H[RR2]
LDE
R4,#1000H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-9. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-9
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (DA)
In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call
(CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC
whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed.
The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for
Load operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented.
Program or
Data Memory
Program Memory
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
dst/src "0" or "1"
OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
LSB Selects Program
Memory or Data Memory:
"0" = Program Memory
"1" = Data Memory
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R5,1234H
;
LDE
R5,1234H
;
The values in the program address (1234H)
are loaded into register R5.
Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-10. Direct Addressing for Load Instructions
3-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (Continued)
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
OPCODE
Sample Instructions:
JP
CALL
C,JOB1
DISPLAY
;
;
Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address
Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address
Figure 3-11. Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions
3-11
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INDIRECT ADDRESS MODE (IA)
In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program
memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed.
Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode.
Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program
memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are
assumed to be all zeros.
Program Memory
Next Instruction
LSB Must be Zero
Current
Instruction
dst
OPCODE
Lower Address Byte
Upper Address Byte
Program Memory
Locations 0-255
Sample Instruction:
CALL
#40H
; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H
and 41H is the subroutine start address.
Figure 3-12. Indirect Addressing
3-12
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADDRESSING MODES
RELATIVE ADDRESS MODE (RA)
In Relative Address (RA) mode, a twos-complement signed displacement between – 128 and + 127 is specified
in the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the
next instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction
immediately following the current instruction.
Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The
instructions that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR.
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Program Memory
Address Used
Displacement
OPCODE
Current Instruction
Current
PC Value
+
Signed
Displacement Value
Sample Instructions:
JR
ULT,$+OFFSET
;
Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128
Figure 3-13. Relative Addressing
3-13
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IMMEDIATE MODE (IM)
In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand
field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate
addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers.
Program Memory
OPERAND
OPCODE
(The Operand value is in the instruction)
Sample Instruction:
LD
R0,#0AAH
Figure 3-14. Immediate Addressing
3-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
4
CONTROL REGISTER
CONTROL REGISTERS
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, detailed descriptions of the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X control registers are presented in an
easy-to-read format. You can use this chapter as a quick-reference source when writing application programs.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the important features of the standard register description format.
Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More detailed
information about control registers is presented in the context of the specific peripheral hardware descriptions in
Part II of this manual.
Data and counter registers are not described in detail in this reference chapter. More information about all of the
registers used by a specific peripheral is presented in the corresponding peripheral descriptions in Part II of this
manual.
The locations and read/write characteristics of all mapped registers in the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X register
file are listed in Table 4-1. The hardware reset value for each mapped register is described in Chapter 8, "RESET
and Power-Down."
Table 4-1. Set 1 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Decimal
R/W
Hex
Locations D0H – D2H are not mapped.
Basic timer control register
BTCON
211
D3H
R/W
CLKCON
212
D4H
R/W
FLAGS
213
D5H
R/W
Register pointer 0
RP0
214
D6H
R/W
Register pointer 1
RP1
215
D7H
R/W
Stack pointer (high byte)
SPH
216
D8H
R/W
Stack pointer (low byte)
SPL
217
D9H
R/W
Instruction pointer (high byte)
IPH
218
DAH
R/W
Instruction pointer (low byte)
IPL
219
DBH
R/W
Interrupt request register
IRQ
220
DCH
R
Interrupt mask register
IMR
221
DDH
R/W
System mode register
SYM
222
DEH
R/W
Register page pointer
PP
223
DFH
R/W
System clock control register
System flags register
4-1
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 4-2. Set 1, Bank 0 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
R/W
Decimal
Hex
Oscillator control register
OSCCON
224
E0H
R/W
SIO control register
SIOCON
225
E1H
R/W
SIO data register
SIODATA
226
E2H
R/W
SIOPS
227
E3H
R/W
Port 0 control register (high byte)
P0CONH
228
E4H
R/W
Port 0 control register (low byte)
P0CONL
229
E5H
R/W
P0PUR
230
E6H
R/W
Port 1 control register (high byte)
P1CONH
231
E7H
R/W
Port 1 control register (low byte)
P1CONL
232
E8H
R/W
P1PUR
233
E9H
R/W
Port 2 control register (high byte)
P2CONH
234
EAH
R/W
Port 2 control register (low byte)
P2CONL
235
EBH
R/W
P2PUR
236
ECH
R/W
Port 3 control register (high byte)
P3CONH
237
EDH
R/W
Port 3 control register (low byte)
P3CONL
238
EEH
R/W
P3PUR
239
EFH
R/W
Port 0 data register
P0
240
F0H
R/W
Port 1 data register
P1
241
F1H
R/W
Port 2 data register
P2
242
F2H
R/W
Port 3 data register
P3
243
F3H
R/W
Port 4 data register
P4
244
F4H
R/W
Port 5 data register
P5
245
F5H
R/W
Port 6 data register
P6
246
F6H
R/W
EXTIPND
247
F7H
R/W
External interrupt control register (high byte)
EXTICONH
248
F8H
R/W
External interrupt control register (low byte)
EXTICONL
249
F9H
R/W
FBH
R/W
FDH
R
FFH
R/W
SIO pre-scaler register
Port 0 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 1 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 2 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 3 Pull-up resistor enable register
External interrupt pending register
Locations FAH are not mapped.
STOP control register
STPCON
251
Locations FCH are not mapped.
Basic timer counter
BTCNT
253
Locations FEH are not mapped.
Interrupt priority register
4-2
IPR
255
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
Table 4-3. Set 1, Bank 1 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
R/W
Decimal
Hex
LCON
224
E0H
R/W
Watch timer control register
WTCON
225
E1H
R/W
Timer A counter
TACNT
226
E2H
R
Timer B counter
TBCNT
227
E3H
R
Timer A data register
TADATA
228
E4H
R/W
Timer B data register
TBDATA
229
E5H
R/W
Timer 1/A control register
TACON
230
E6H
R/W
Timer B control register
TBCON
231
E7H
R/W
Clock output control register
CLOCON
232
E8H
R/W
Port 4 control register (high byte)
P4CONH
233
E9H
R/W
Port 4 control register (low byte)
P4CONL
234
EAH
R/W
Port 5 control register (high byte)
P5CONH
235
EBH
R/W
Port 5 control register (low byte)
P5CONL
236
ECH
R/W
Port 6 control register
P6CON
237
EDH
R/W
LCD control Register
Locations EEH – EFH are not mapped.
Flash memory control register
FMCON
240
F0H
R/W
Flash memory user programming enable register
FMUSR
241
F1H
R/W
Flash memory sector address register (high byte)
FMSECH
242
F2H
R/W
Flash memory sector address register (low byte)
FMSECL
243
F3H
R/W
Battery level detector control register
BLDCON
244
F4H
R/W
Locations E5H – FFH are not mapped.
NOTES:
1. An “x” means that the bit value is undefined following reset.
2. A dash(“–“) means that the bit is neither used nor mapped, but the bit is read as “0”.
4-3
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Bit number(s) that is/are appended to
the register name for bit addressing
Register ID
Name of individual
bit or related bits
Register location
in the internal
register file
Register address
(hexadecimal)
Full Register name
FLAGS - System Flags Register
D5H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Addressing
Register addressing mode only
Mode
.7
Carry Flag (C)
.6
0
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
1
Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z)
0
Operation result is a non-zero value
1
Operation result is zero
.5
Sign Flag (S)
0
Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0")
1
Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1")
R = Read-only
W = Write-only
R/W = Read/write
'-' = Not used
Description of the
effect of specific
bit settings
nRESET value notation:
'-' = Not used
'x' = Undetermined value
'0' = Logic zero
'1' = Logic one
Type of addressing
that must be used to
address the bit
(1-bit, 4-bit, or 8-bit)
Figure 4-1. Register Description Format
4-4
Bit number:
MSB = Bit 7
LSB = Bit 0
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
BLDCON — Battery Level Detector Control Register
F4H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
–
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.5
VIN Source Bit
.4
.3
.2–.0
0
Internal source
1
External source
Battery Level Detector Output Bit
0
VIN > VREF (when BLD is enabled)
1
VIN < VREF (when BLD is enabled)
Battery Level Detector Enable/Disable Bit
0
Disable BLD
1
Enable BLD
Detection Voltage Selection Bits
0
0
0
VBLD = 2.2V
1
0
1
VBLD = 2.4V
0
1
1
VBLD = 2.8V
Other values
Not available
4-5
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTCON — Basic Timer Control Register
D3H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Watchdog Timer Function Disable Code (for System Reset)
1
0
1
0
Other values
.3–.2
.1
.0
Disable watchdog timer function
Enable watchdog timer function
Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
fxx/4096 (3)
0
1
fxx/1024
1
0
fxx/128
1
1
fxx/16
Basic Timer Counter Clear Bit (1)
0
No effect
1
Clear the basic timer counter value
Clock Frequency Divider Clear Bit for Basic Timer and Timer/Counters (2)
0
No effect
1
Clear both clock frequency dividers
NOTES:
1. When you write a “1” to BTCON.1, the basic timer counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write
operation, the BTCON.1 value is automatically cleared to “0”.
2. When you write a "1" to BTCON.0, the corresponding frequency divider is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the
write operation, the BTCON.0 value is automatically cleared to "0".
3. The fxx is selected clock for system (main OSC. or sub OSC.).
4-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
CLKCON — System Clock Control Register
D4H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
–
0
0
–
–
–
Read/Write
R/W
–
–
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Oscillator IRQ Wake-up Function Bit
0
Enable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode
1
Disable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode
.6–.5
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X (must keep always “0”)
.4–.3
CPU Clock (System Clock) Selection Bits (note)
.2–.0
0
0
fxx/16
0
1
fxx/8
1
0
fxx/2
1
1
fxx
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X (must keep always “0”)
NOTE: After a reset, the slowest clock (divided by 16) is selected as the system clock. To select faster clock speeds, load
the appropriate values to CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4.
4-7
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CLOCON — Clock Output Control Register
E8H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.2
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X (must keep always “0”)
.1–.0
Clock Output Frequency Selection Bits
4-8
0
0
Select fxx/64
0
1
Select fxx/16
1
0
Select fxx/8
1
1
Select fxx/4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
EXTICONH — External Interrupt Control Register (High Byte)
F8H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P1.7 External Interrupt (INT7) Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P1.6 External Interrupt (INT6) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P1.5 External Interrupt (INT5) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P1.4 External Interrupt (INT4) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
4-9
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
EXTICONL — External Interrupt Control Register (Low Byte)
F9H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P1.3 External Interrupt (INT3) Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-10
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P0.2 External Interrupt (INT2) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P0.1 External Interrupt (INT1) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
P0.0 External Interrupt (INT0) Configuration Bits
0
0
Disable interrupt
0
1
Enable interrupt by falling edge
1
0
Enable interrupt by rising edge
1
1
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
EXTIPND — External Interrupt Pending Register
F7H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
P1.7/INT7 Interrupt Pending Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P1.6/INT6 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P1.5/INT5 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P1.4/INT4 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P1.3/INT3 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P0.2/INT2 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P0.1/INT1 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
P0.0/INT0 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
4-11
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
FLAGS — System Flags Register
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
D5H
.5
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
x
x
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
Carry Flag (C)
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
4-12
Set 1
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
0
R
0
R/W
0
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
1
Operation generates a carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z)
0
Operation result is a non-zero value
1
Operation result is zero
Sign Flag (S)
0
Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0")
1
Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1")
Overflow Flag (V)
0
Operation result is ≤ +127 or ≥ –128
1
Operation result is > +127 or < –128
Decimal Adjust Flag (D)
0
Add operation completed
1
Subtraction operation completed
Half-Carry Flag (H)
0
No carry-out of bit 3 or no borrow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction
1
Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated borrow into bit 3
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS)
0
Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read)
1
Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read)
Bank Address Selection Flag (BA)
0
Bank 0 is selected
1
Bank 1 is selected
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
FMCON — Flash Memory Control Register
F0H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
–
–
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Flash Memory Mode Selection Bits
0
1
0
1
Programming mode
1
0
1
0
Sector erase mode
0
1
1
0
Hard lock mode
Other values
.3
Not available
Sector Erase Status Bit
0
Success sector erase
1
Fail sector erase
.2–.1
Not used for the S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X
.0
Flash Operation Start Bit
0
Operation stop
1
Operation start (This bit will be cleared automatically just after the
corresponding operator completed).
4-13
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
FMSECH — Flash Memory Sector Address Register (High Byte)
F2H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Flash Memory Sector Address Bits (High Byte)
The 15th - 8th bits to select a sector of flash ROM
NOTE: The high-byte flash memory sector address pointer value is the higher eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
FMSECL — Flash Memory Sector Address Register (Low Byte)
F3H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Flash Memory Sector Address Bit (Low Byte)
The 7th bit to select a sector of flash ROM
.6–.0
Bits 6–0
Don't care
NOTE: The low-byte flash memory sector address pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
4-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
FMUSR — Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register
F1H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Bits
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Enable user programming mode
Other values
Disable user programming mode
4-15
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IMR — Interrupt Mask Register
DDH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Enable Bit; External Interrupts P1.4–1.7
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.6
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Enable Bit; External Interrupts P1.3
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.5
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Enable Bit; External Interrupt P0.2
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.4
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Enable Bit; External Interrupt P0.1
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.3
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Enable Bit; External Interrupt P0.0
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.2
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Enable Bit; Watch Timer Overflow
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.1
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Enable Bit; SIO Interrupt
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
.0
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Enable Bit; Timer 1/A Match, Timer B Match
0 Disable (mask)
1 Enable (unmask)
NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, any interrupt requests that may be issued are not recognized by the CPU.
4-16
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
IPH — Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
DAH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP15–IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL
register (DBH).
IPL — Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
DBH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP7–IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH
register (DAH).
4-17
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IPR — Interrupt Priority Register
Bit Identifier
.7
FFH
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
x
x
x
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7, .4, and .1
Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C (note)
.6
.5
.3
.2
.0
0
0
0
Group priority undefined
0
0
1
B > C > A
0
1
0
A > B > C
0
1
1
B > A > C
1
0
0
C > A > B
1
0
1
C > B > A
1
1
0
A > C > B
1
1
1
Group priority undefined
Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ6 > IRQ7
1
IRQ7 > IRQ6
Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1
(IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ3 > IRQ4
1
IRQ4 > IRQ3
Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1
(IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ0 > IRQ1
1
IRQ1 > IRQ0
NOTE: Interrupt Group A – IRQ0, IRQ1
Interrupt Group B – IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4
Interrupt Group C – IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
4-18
Set 1, Bank 0
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
IRQ — Interrupt Request Register
DCH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P1.4–1.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P1.3
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P0.2
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P0.1
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P0.0
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit; Watch Timer Overflow
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit; SIO Interrupt
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit; Timer 1/A Match, Timer B Match
0
Not pending
1
Pending
4-19
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LCON — LCD Control Register
E0H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Internal LCD Dividing Resistors Enable Bit
.6–.5
.4–.2
0
Enable internal LCD dividing resistors
1
Disable internal LCD dividing resistors
LCD Clock Selection Bits
0
0
fw/29 (64 Hz)
0
1
fw/28 (128 Hz)
1
0
fw/27 (256 Hz)
1
1
fw/26 (512 Hz)
LCD Duty and Bias Selection Bits
0
0
0
1/4duty, 1/3bias
0
0
1
1/3duty, 1/3bias
0
1
0
1/3duty, 1/2bias
0
1
1
1/2duty, 1/2bias
1
x
x
Static
NOTES:
1. "x" means don't care.
2. When 1/2 bias is selected, the bias levels are set as VLC0, VLC1 (VLC2), and VSS.
.1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.0
LCD Display Control Bit
4-20
0
Turn display off (Turn off the P-Tr)
1
Turn display on (Turn on the P-Tr)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
OSCCON — Oscillator Control Register
E0H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
–
–
0
0
–
0
Read/Write
R/W
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Sub Oscillator Circuit Selection Bit
0
Initial state
1
Power saving circuit for sub oscillator (Automatically cleared to "0" when the
sub oscillator is stopped by OSCCON.2).
NOTES:
1. The OSCCON.7 must be maintained to “1”, during the sub oscillator operation.
2. A capacitor (0.1uF) should be connected between VREG and GND.
.6–.4
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.3
Main Oscillator Control Bit
.2
0
Main oscillator RUN
1
Main oscillator STOP
Sub Oscillator Control Bit
0
Sub oscillator RUN
1
Sub oscillator STOP
.1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.0
System Clock Selection Bit
0
Select main oscillator for system clock
1
Select sub oscillator for system clock
4-21
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P0CONH — Port 0 Control Register (High Byte)
E4H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P0.7/BUZ Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-22
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (BUZ)
P0.6/CLKOUT Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (CLKOUT)
P0.5/TBOUT Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (TBOUT)
P0.4/TAOUT Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (TAOUT)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P0CONL — Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte)
E5H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P0.3/T1CLK Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode (T1CLK)
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P0.2/INT2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P0.1/INT1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P0.0/INT0 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
4-23
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P0PUR — Port 0 Pull-Up Control Register
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
E6H
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
P0.7's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
Set 1, Bank 0
P0.6's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.5's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.4's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.3's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.2's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.1's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P0.0's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE: A pull-up resistor of port 0 is automatically disabled only when the corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output
or alternative function.
4-24
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P1CONH — Port 1 Control Register (High Byte)
E7H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P1.7/INT7 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P1.6/INT6 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P1.5/INT5 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P1.4/INT4 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
4-25
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P1CONL — Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte)
E8H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P1.3/INT3 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-26
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P1.2/SI Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode (SI)
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
P1.1/SO Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SO)
P1.0/SCK Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input mode (SCK)
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SCK)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P1PUR — Port 1 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
F9H
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
P1.7's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
Set 1, Bank 0
P1.6's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.5's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.4's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.3's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.2's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.1's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P1.0's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE: A pull-up resistor of port 1 is automatically disabled only when the corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output
or alternative function.
4-27
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P2CONH — Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)
EAH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P2.7/SEG24 Configuration Bits
.5-.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-28
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG24)
P2.6/SEG25 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG25)
P2.5/SEG26 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG26)
P2.4/SEG27 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG27)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P2CONL — Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)
EBH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P2.3/SEG28 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG28)
P2.2/SEG29 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG29)
P2.1/SEG30 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG30)
P2.0/SEG31/VBLDREF Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG31 or VBLDREF)
4-29
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P2PUR — Port 2 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
ECH
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
P2.7's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
Set 1, Bank 0
P2.6's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.5's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.4's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.3's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.2's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.1's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P2.0's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE: A pull-up resistor of port 2 is automatically disabled only when the corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output
or alternative function.
4-30
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P3CONH — Port 3 Control Register (High Byte)
EDH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P3.7/SEG16 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG16)
P3.6/SEG17 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG17)
P3.5/SEG18 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG18)
P3.4/SEG19 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG19)
4-31
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P3CONL — Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte)
EEH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P3.3/SEG20 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-32
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG20)
P3.2/SEG21 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG21)
P3.1/SEG22 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG22)
P3.0/SEG23 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
N-channel open-drain output mode
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG23)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P3PUR — Port 3 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
EFH
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
Reset Value
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
P3.7's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
Set 1, Bank 0
P3.6's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.5's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.4's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.3's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.2's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.1's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
P3.0's Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE: A pull-up resistor of port 3 is automatically disabled only when the corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output
or alternative function.
4-33
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P4CONH — Port 4 Control Register (High Byte)
E9H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P4.7/SEG8 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-34
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG8)
P4.6/SEG9 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG9)
P4.5/SEG10 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG10)
P4.4/SEG11 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG11)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P4CONL — Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte)
EAH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P4.3/SEG12 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG12)
P4.2/SEG13 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG13)
P4.1/SEG14 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG14)
P4.0/SEG15 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG15)
4-35
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P5CONH — Port 5 Control Register (High Byte)
EBH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P5.7/SEG0 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-36
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG0)
P5.6/SEG1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG1)
P5.5/SEG2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG2)
P5.4/SEG3 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG3)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
P5CONL — Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte)
ECH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P5.3/SEG4 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG4)
P5.2/SEG5 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG5)
P5.1/SEG6 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG6)
P5.0/SEG7 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (SEG7)
4-37
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
P6CON — Port 6 Control Register
EDH
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P6.3/COM3 Configuration Bits
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
4-38
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (COM3)
P6.2/COM2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (COM2)
P6.1/COM1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (COM1)
P6.0/COM0 Configuration Bits
0
0
Input mode
0
1
Input mode with pull-up resistor
1
0
Push-pull output mode
1
1
Alternative function (COM0)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
PP — Register Page Pointer
DFH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Destination Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
Destination: page 0
0
0
0
1
Destination: page 1 (Not used for the S3C8278X/C8274X)
0
0
1
0
Destination: page 2
Others
.3– .0
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Source Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
Source: page 0
0
0
0
1
Source: page 1 (Not used for the S3C8278X/C8274X)
0
0
1
0
Source: page 2
Others
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
NOTES:
1. In the S3C8275X microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as three pages (Pages 0-2).
The pages 0-1 are used for general purpose register file, and page 2 is used for LCD data register or general
purpose registers.
2. In the S3C8278X/C8274X microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as two pages (Pages 0, 2).
The page 0 is used for general purpose register file, and page 2 is used for LCD data register or general purpose
registers.
4-39
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RP0 — Register Pointer 0
D6H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7–.3
Register Pointer 0 Address Value
Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select
two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset,
RP0 points to address C0H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register
slice C0H–C7H.
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
RP1 — Register Pointer 1
D7H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
1
1
0
0
1
–
–
–
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7– .3
Register Pointer 1 Address Value
Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select
two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset,
RP1 points to address C8H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register
slice C8H–CFH.
.2– .0
4-40
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
SIOCON — SIO Control Register
E1H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
SIO Shift Clock Selection Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Internal clock (P.S clock)
1
External clock (SCK)
Data Direction Control Bit
0
MSB-first mode
1
LSB-first mode
SIO Mode Selection Bit
0
Receive-only mode
1
Transmit/receive mode
Shift Clock Edge Selection Bit
0
Tx at falling edges, Rx at rising edges
1
Tx at rising edges, Rx at falling edges
SIO Counter Clear and Shift Start Bit
0
No action
1
Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
SIO Shift Operation Enable Bit
0
Disable shifter and clock counter
1
Enable shifter and clock counter
SIO Interrupt Enable Bit
0
Disable SIO interrupt
1
Enable SIO interrupt
SIO Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read), Clear pending bit (when write)
0
Interrupt is pending (when read)
4-41
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SPH — Stack Pointer (High Byte)
D8H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte stack pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP15–SP8). The lower byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPL (D9H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
SPL — Stack Pointer (Low Byte)
D9H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte stack pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP7–SP0). The upper byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPH (D8H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
4-42
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
STPCON — Stop Control Register
FBH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
STOP Control Bits
10100101
Enable stop instruction
Other values
Disable stop instruction
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as “10100101b”. Otherwise the STOP instruction will
not execute as well as reset will be generated.
4-43
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SYM — System Mode Register
DEH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
–
x
x
x
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
This bit must remain logic "0"
.6–.5
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.4–.2
Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits (1)
.1
.0
0
0
0
IRQ0
0
0
1
IRQ1
0
1
0
IRQ2
0
1
1
IRQ3
1
0
0
IRQ4
1
0
1
IRQ5
1
1
0
IRQ6
1
1
1
IRQ7
Fast Interrupt Enable Bit (2)
0
Disable fast interrupt processing
1
Enable fast interrupt processing
Global Interrupt Enable Bit (3)
0
Disable all interrupt processing
1
Enable all interrupt processing
NOTES:
1. You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing.
2. Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2–SYM.4.
3. Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction
(not by writing a "1" to SYM.0).
4-44
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
TACON — Timer 1/A Control Register
E6H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Timer 1 Operating Mode Selection Bit
.6–.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Two 8-bit timers mode (timer A/B)
1
One 16-bit timer mode (timer 1)
Timer 1/A Clock Selection Bits
0
0
0
fxx/512
0
0
1
fxx/256
0
1
0
fxx/64
0
1
1
fxx/8
1
0
0
fxx (system clock)
1
0
1
fxt (sub clock)
1
1
0
T1CLK (external clock)
1
1
1
Not available
Timer 1/A Counter Clear Bit
0
No effect
1
Clear the timer 1/A counter (when write, automatically cleared to "0" after being
cleared basic timer counter)
Timer 1/A Counter Operating Enable Bit
0
Disable counting operation
1
Enable counting operation
Timer 1/A Interrupt Enable Bit
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
Timer 1/A Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read), clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
4-45
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
TBCON — Timer B Control Register
E7H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Not used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
.6–.4
Timer B Clock Selection Bits
0
0
0
fxx/512
0
0
1
fxx/256
0
1
0
fxx/64
0
1
1
fxx/8
1
0
0
fxt (sub clock)
Others
.3
.2
.1
.0
4-46
Not available
Timer B Counter Clear Bit
0
No effect
1
Clear the timer B counter (when write, automatically cleared to "0" after being
cleared basic timer counter)
Timer B Counter Operating Enable Bit
0
Disable counting operation
1
Enable counting operation
Timer B Interrupt Enable Bit
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
Timer B Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read), clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONTROL REGISTER
WTCON — Watch Timer Control Register
E1H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Watch Timer Clock Selection Bit
.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1
.0
0
Main system clock divided by 27 (fx/128)
1
Sub system clock (fxt)
Watch Timer Interrupt Enable Bit
0
Disable watch timer interrupt
1
Enable watch timer interrupt
Buzzer Signal Selection Bits
0
0
0.5 kHz
0
1
1 kHz
1
0
2 kHz
1
1
4 kHz
Watch Timer Speed Selection Bits
0
0
Set watch timer interrupt to 1s
0
1
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5s
1
0
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25s
1
1
Set watch timer interrupt to 3.91ms
Watch Timer Enable Bit
0
Disable watch timer; Clear frequency dividing circuits
1
Enable watch timer
Watch Timer Interrupt Pending Bit
0
Interrupt is not pending, clear pending bit when write
1
Interrupt is pending
NOTE: Watch timer clock frequency (fw) is assumed to be 32.768 kHz.
4-47
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
OVERVIEW
The S3C8-series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The SAM8RC
CPU recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific interrupt
level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector address can be
assigned to one or more sources.
Levels
Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks
can issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight
possible interrupt levels: IRQ0−IRQ7, also called level 0−level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an
interrupt request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from
device to device. The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels.
The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just
identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is
determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by IPR
settings lets you define more complex priority relationships between different levels.
Vectors
Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The
maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for
S3C8-series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector
priorities are set in hardware. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X uses twelve vectors.
Sources
A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow.
Each vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X interrupt structure, there are
twelve possible interrupt sources.
When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or
cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which
method would be used to clear its respective pending bit.
5-1
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT TYPES
The three components of the S3C8 interrupt structure described before ⎯ levels, vectors, and sources ⎯ are
combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt
logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3.
The types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1):
Type 1:
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1)
Type 2:
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 − Sn)
Type 3:
One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 − Vn) + multiple sources (S1 − Sn , Sn+1 − Sn+m)
In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented.
Type 1:
Levels
Vectors
Sources
IRQn
V1
S1
S1
Type 2:
IRQn
V1
S2
S3
Sn
Type 3:
IRQn
V1
S1
V2
S2
V3
S3
Vn
Sn
Sn + 1
NOTES:
1. The number of S n and Vn value is expandable.
2. In the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X implementation,
interrupt types 1 and 3 are used.
Figure 5-1. S3C8-Series Interrupt Types
5-2
Sn + 2
Sn + m
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller supports twelve interrupt sources. All twelve of the interrupt
sources have a corresponding interrupt vector address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this
device-specific interrupt structure, as shown in Figure 5-2.
When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which
contending interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt
with the lowest vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single
level are fixed in hardware).
When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the
program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched
from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the
service routine is executed.
Levels
Vectors
Sources
Reset/Clear
RESET
100H
Basic timer overflow
H/W
F0H
Timer 1/A match
S/W
F2H
Timer B match
S/W
IRQ1
F4H
SIO interrupt
S/W
IRQ2
F6H
Watch timer overflow
S/W
IRQ3
E0H
P0.0 external interrupt
S/W
IRQ4
E2H
P0.1 external interrupt
S/W
IRQ5
E4H
P0.2 external interrupt
S/W
IRQ6
E6H
P1.3 external interrupt
S/W
E8H
P1.4 external interrupt
S/W
EAH
P1.5 external interrupt
S/W
ECH
P1.6 external interrupt
S/W
EEH
P1.7 external interrupt
S/W
IRQ0
IRQ7
NOTES:
1. Within a given interrupt level, the low vector address has high priority.
For example, F0H has higher priority than F2H within the level IRQ0 the priorities within each
level are set at the factory.
2. External interrupts are triggered by a rising or falling edge, depending on the corresponding control
register setting.
Figure 5-2. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Interrupt Structure
5-3
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
All interrupt vector addresses for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X interrupt structure are stored in the vector
address area of the internal 16-Kbyte ROM, 0H−3FFFH, or 8, 4-Kbyte (see Figure 5-3).
You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be
careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses (Table 5-1 lists all vector addresses).
The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
The reset address of ROM can be changed by a smart option only in the S3F8275X (Full-Flash Device). Refer to
the chapter 16. Embedded Flash Memory Interface for more detail contents.
(HEX)
3FFFH
(Decimal)
16,383
16-Kbyte
1FFFH
8,191
8-Kbyte
0FFFH
4,095
4-Kbyte
Internal
Program Memory
(ROM) Area
255
Interrupt Vector Area
Smart Option Area
100H
FFH
3FH
3CH
0
00H
Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area
5-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
Table 5-1. Interrupt Vectors
Vector Address
Decimal
Value
Hex
Value
256
100H
242
Interrupt Source
Request
Reset/Clear
Interrupt
Level
Priority in
Level
H/W
S/W
Basic timer overflow
Reset
−
√
F2H
Timer B match
IRQ0
1
√
240
F0H
Timer 1/A match
0
√
244
F4H
SIO interrupt
IRQ1
−
√
246
F6H
Watch timer overflow
IRQ2
−
√
224
E0H
P0.0 external interrupt
IRQ3
−
√
226
E2H
P0.1 external interrupt
IRQ4
−
√
228
E4H
P0.2 external interrupt
IRQ5
−
√
230
E6H
P1.3 external interrupt
IRQ6
−
√
238
EEH
P1.7 external interrupt
IRQ7
3
√
236
ECH
P1.6 external interrupt
2
√
234
EAH
P1.5 external interrupt
1
√
232
E8H
P1.4 external interrupt
0
√
NOTES:
1. Interrupt priorities are identified in inverse order: "0" is the highest priority, "1" is the next highest, and so on.
2. If two or more interrupts within the same level contend, the interrupt with the lowest vector address usually has priority
over one with a higher vector address. The priorities within a given level are fixed in hardware.
5-5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ENABLE/DISABLE INTERRUPT INSTRUCTIONS (EI, DI)
Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then
serviced as they occur according to the established priorities.
NOTE
The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally
enable the interrupt structure.
During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable
interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register.
SYSTEM-LEVEL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt
processing:
•
The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels.
•
The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels.
•
The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to
each interrupt source).
•
The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable
fast interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented).
Table 5-2. Interrupt Control Register Overview
Control Register
ID
R/W
Function Description
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt
processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0−IRQ7.
Interrupt priority register
IPR
R/W
Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels.
The seven levels of S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X are organized
into three groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1,
group B is IRQ2, IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6,
and IRQ7.
Interrupt request register
IRQ
R
System mode register
SYM
R/W
This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt
level.
This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing and
dynamic global interrupt processing.
NOTE: Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable. Using DI instruction is recommended.
5-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PROCESSING CONTROL POINTS
Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The
system-level control points in the interrupt structure are:
— Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0 )
— Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register)
— Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register)
— Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers
NOTE
When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary
register file address (register pointer) information.
EI
S
nRESET
R
Q
Interrupt Request Register
(Read-only)
Polling
Cycle
IRQ0-IRQ7,
Interrupts
Interrupt Priority
Register
Vector
Interrupt
Cycle
Interrupt Mask
Register
Global Interrupt Control (EI,
DI or SYM.0 manipulation)
Figure 5-4. Interrupt Function Diagram
5-7
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the
interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-3).
Table 5-3. Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Level
Register(s)
Location(s) in Set 1
Timer B match
Timer 1/A match
IRQ0
TBCON, TBDATA, TBCNT
TACON, TADATA, TACNT
E7H, E5H, E3H, bank 1
E6H, E4H, E2H, bank 1
SIO interrupt
IRQ1
SIOCON
SIODATA
SIOPS
E1H, bank 0
E2H, bank 0
E3H, bank 0
Watch timer overflow
IRQ2
WTCON
E1H, bank 1
P0.0 external interrupt
IRQ3
P0CONL
EXTICONL
EXTIPND
E5H, bank 0
F9H, bank 0
F7H, bank 0
P0.1 external interrupt
IRQ4
P0CONL
EXTICONL
EXTIPND
E5H, bank 0
F9H, bank 0
F7H, bank 0
P0.2 external interrupt
IRQ5
P0CONL
EXTICONL
EXTIPND
E5H, bank 0
F9H, bank 0
F7H, bank 0
P1.3 external interrupt
IRQ6
P1CONL
EXTICONL
EXTIPND
E8H, bank 0
F9H, bank 0
F7H, bank 0
P1.7 external interrupt
P1.6 external interrupt
P1.5 external interrupt
P1.4 external interrupt
IRQ7
P1CONH
EXTICONH
EXTIPND
E7H, bank 0
F8H, bank 0
F7H, bank 0
NOTE: If an interrupt is un-mask (Enable interrupt level) in the IMR register, the pending bit and enable bit of the interrupt
should be written after a DI instruction is executed.
5-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
SYSTEM MODE REGISTER (SYM)
The system mode register, SYM (set 1, DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing and to
control fast interrupt processing (see Figure 5-5).
A reset clears SYM.1, and SYM.0 to "0". The 3-bit value for fast interrupt level selection, SYM.4−SYM.2, is
undetermined.
The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0
value of the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be
included in the initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly
to enable and disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions
for this purpose.
System Mode Register (SYM)
DEH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Global interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable all interrupts processing
1 = Enable all interrupts processing
Always logic "0"
Not used for the
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Fast interrupt level
selection bits:
0 0 0 = IRQ0
0 0 1 = IRQ1
0 1 0 = IRQ2
0 1 1 = IRQ3
1 0 0 = IRQ4
1 0 1 = IRQ5
1 1 0 = IRQ6
1 1 1 = IRQ7
Fast interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable fast interrupts processing
1 = Enable fast interrupts processing
NOTES:
1. You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing.
2. Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt processing for the
interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2-SYM.4.
3. Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing EI instruction
(not by writing a "1" to SYM.0)
Figure 5-5. System Mode Register (SYM)
5-9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR)
The interrupt mask register, IMR (set 1, DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required
settings by the initialization routine.
Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of
an interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's
IMR bit to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked).
The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH in set 1. Bit values can be read and written by instructions
using the Register addressing mode.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
DDH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
IRQ2
IRQ7
NOTE:
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
.1
IRQ1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
IRQ3
Interrupt level enable bits:
0 = Disable (mask) interrupt level
1 = Enable (un-mask) interrupt level
Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable.
Using DI instruction is recommended.
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
5-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (IPR)
The interrupt priority register, IPR (set 1, bank 0, FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in
the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be
written to their required settings by the initialization routine.
When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two
sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This
priority is fixed in hardware).
To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by
the interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register
priority definitions (see Figure 5-7):
Group A
IRQ0, IRQ1
Group B
IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4
Group C
IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
IPR
Group A
A1
IPR
Group B
A2
B1
IPR
Group C
B2
B21
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2 IRQ3
C1
B22
IRQ4
C2
C21
IRQ5 IRQ6
C22
IRQ7
Figure 5-7. Interrupt Request Priority Groups
As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C.
For example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B"
would select the relationship C > B > A.
The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows:
•
IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts.
•
Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5,
6, and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C.
•
IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts.
5-11
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
FFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Group priority:
Group A:
0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1
1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0
D7 D4 D1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
= Undefined
=B>C>A
=A>B>C
=B>A>C
=C>A>B
=C>B>A
=A>C>B
= Undefined
Group B:
0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Subgroup B:
0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4
1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3
Group C:
0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Subgroup C:
0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7
1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6
Figure 5-8. Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
5-12
LSB
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER (IRQ)
You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (set 1, DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all
levels in the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number:
bit 0 to IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that
level. A "1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level.
IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the
IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to “0”.
You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing
is disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can,
however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events
occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled.
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
DCH, Set 1, Read-only
MSB
.7
IRQ7
.6
IRQ6
.5
IRQ5
.4
IRQ4
.3
IRQ3
.2
IRQ2
.1
IRQ1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
Interrupt level request pending bits:
0 = Interrupt level is not pending
1 = Interrupt level is pending
Figure 5-9. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
5-13
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT PENDING FUNCTION TYPES
Overview
There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt
service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine.
Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware
For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding
pending bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting
to be serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine,
and clears the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written
by application software.
Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine
The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must
clear the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be
written to the corresponding pending bit location in the source’s mode or control register.
Programming Tip ⎯ How to clear an interrupt pending bit
As the following examples are shown, a load instruction should be used to clear an interrupt pending bit.
Examples:
1.
SB0
LD
•
•
•
IRET
5-14
EXTIPND, #11111011B
; Clear P0.2's interrupt pending bit
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT SOURCE POLLING SEQUENCE
The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows:
1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1".
2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source.
3. The CPU checks the source's interrupt level.
4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal.
5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address.
6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software).
7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests.
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met:
•
Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1")
•
The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register)
•
The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one levels are currently requesting service
•
The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register)
When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle.
The CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence:
1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts.
2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack.
3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine.
4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine.
When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores
the PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request.
5-15
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
GENERATING INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H−FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that
correspond to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence:
1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack.
2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack.
3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack.
4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location.
5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location.
6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address.
NOTE
A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H−FFH.
NESTING OF VECTORED INTERRUPTS
It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this,
you must follow these steps:
1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR).
2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt.
3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it
occurs).
4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, restore the IMR to its original value by returning the
previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR).
5. Execute an IRET.
Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent.
INSTRUCTION POINTER (IP)
The instruction pointer (IP) is adopted by all the S3C8-series microcontrollers to control the optional high-speed
interrupt processing feature called fast interrupts. The IP consists of register pair DAH and DBH. The names of IP
registers are IPH (high byte, IP15−IP8) and IPL (low byte, IP7−IP0).
FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING
The feature called fast interrupt processing allows an interrupt within a given level to be completed in
approximately 6 clock cycles rather than the usual 16 clock cycles. To select a specific interrupt level for fast
interrupt processing, you write the appropriate 3-bit value to SYM.4−SYM.2. Then, to enable fast interrupt
processing for the selected level, you set SYM.1 to “1”.
5-16
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING (Continued)
Two other system registers support fast interrupt processing:
•
The instruction pointer (IP) contains the starting address of the service routine (and is later used to swap the
program counter values), and
•
When a fast interrupt occurs, the contents of the FLAGS register is stored in an unmapped, dedicated register
called FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”).
NOTE
For the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller, the service routine for any one of the eight interrupt
levels: IRQ0–IRQ7, can be selected for fast interrupt processing.
Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts
To initiate fast interrupt processing, follow these steps:
1. Load the start address of the service routine into the instruction pointer (IP).
2. Load the interrupt level number (IRQn) into the fast interrupt selection field (SYM.4–SYM.2)
3. Write a "1" to the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register.
Fast Interrupt Service Routine
When an interrupt occurs in the level selected for fast interrupt processing, the following events occur:
1. The contents of the instruction pointer and the PC are swapped.
2. The FLAG register values are written to the FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”) register.
3. The fast interrupt status bit in the FLAGS register is set.
4. The interrupt is serviced.
5. Assuming that the fast interrupt status bit is set, when the fast interrupt service routine ends, the instruction
pointer and PC values are swapped back.
6. The content of FLAGS' (“FLAGS prime”) is copied automatically back to the FLAGS register.
7. The fast interrupt status bit in FLAGS is cleared automatically.
Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types
As described previously, there are two types of interrupt pending bits: One type that is automatically cleared by
hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared by the
application program's interrupt service routine. You can select fast interrupt processing for interrupts with either
type of pending condition clear function ⎯ by hardware or by software.
Programming Guidelines
Remember that the only way to enable/disable a fast interrupt is to set/clear the fast interrupt enable bit in the
SYM register, SYM.1. Executing an EI or DI instruction globally enables or disables all interrupt processing,
including fast interrupts. If you use fast interrupts, remember to load the IP with a new start address when the fast
interrupt service routine ends.
5-17
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
6
INSTRUCTION SET
INSTRUCTION SET
OVERVIEW
The SAM88RC instruction set is specifically designed to support the large register files that are typical of most
SAM8 microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the
instruction set include:
•
A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide
•
No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file)
•
Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations
•
16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented
•
Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations
DATA TYPES
The SAM8 CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can
be set, cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least
significant (right-most) bit.
REGISTER ADDRESSING
To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0-255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is
specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data or 16-bit program memory or data memory
addresses. For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Section 2, "Address Spaces."
ADDRESSING MODES
There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative
(RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to
Section 3, "Addressing Modes."
6-1
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary
Mnemonic
Operands
Instruction
Load Instructions
CLR
dst
Clear
LD
dst,src
Load
LDB
dst,src
Load bit
LDE
dst,src
Load external data memory
LDC
dst,src
Load program memory
LDED
dst,src
Load external data memory and decrement
LDCD
dst,src
Load program memory and decrement
LDEI
dst,src
Load external data memory and increment
LDCI
dst,src
Load program memory and increment
LDEPD
dst,src
Load external data memory with pre-decrement
LDCPD
dst,src
Load program memory with pre-decrement
LDEPI
dst,src
Load external data memory with pre-increment
LDCPI
dst,src
Load program memory with pre-increment
LDW
dst,src
Load word
POP
dst
Pop from stack
POPUD
dst,src
Pop user stack (decrementing)
POPUI
dst,src
Pop user stack (incrementing)
PUSH
src
Push to stack
PUSHUD
dst,src
Push user stack (decrementing)
PUSHUI
dst,src
Push user stack (incrementing)
6-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Instruction
Arithmetic Instructions
ADC
dst,src
Add with carry
ADD
dst,src
Add
CP
dst,src
Compare
DA
dst
Decimal adjust
DEC
dst
Decrement
DECW
dst
Decrement word
DIV
dst,src
Divide
INC
dst
Increment
INCW
dst
Increment word
MULT
dst,src
Multiply
SBC
dst,src
Subtract with carry
SUB
dst,src
Subtract
AND
dst,src
Logical AND
COM
dst
Complement
OR
dst,src
Logical OR
XOR
dst,src
Logical exclusive OR
Logic Instructions
6-3
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Instruction
Program Control Instructions
BTJRF
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on false
BTJRT
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on true
CALL
dst
Call procedure
CPIJE
dst,src
Compare, increment and jump on equal
CPIJNE
dst,src
Compare, increment and jump on non-equal
DJNZ
r,dst
Decrement register and jump on non-zero
ENTER
Enter
EXIT
Exit
IRET
Interrupt return
JP
cc,dst
Jump on condition code
JP
dst
Jump unconditional
JR
cc,dst
Jump relative on condition code
NEXT
Next
RET
Return
WFI
Wait for interrupt
Bit Manipulation Instructions
BAND
dst,src
Bit AND
BCP
dst,src
Bit compare
BITC
dst
Bit complement
BITR
dst
Bit reset
BITS
dst
Bit set
BOR
dst,src
Bit OR
BXOR
dst,src
Bit XOR
TCM
dst,src
Test complement under mask
TM
dst,src
Test under mask
6-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Concluded)
Mnemonic
Operands
Instruction
Rotate and Shift Instructions
RL
dst
Rotate left
RLC
dst
Rotate left through carry
RR
dst
Rotate right
RRC
dst
Rotate right through carry
SRA
dst
Shift right arithmetic
SWAP
dst
Swap nibbles
CPU Control Instructions
CCF
Complement carry flag
DI
Disable interrupts
EI
Enable interrupts
IDLE
Enter Idle mode
NOP
No operation
RCF
Reset carry flag
SB0
Set bank 0
SB1
Set bank 1
SCF
Set carry flag
SRP
src
Set register pointers
SRP0
src
Set register pointer 0
SRP1
src
Set register pointer 1
STOP
Enter Stop mode
6-5
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
FLAGS REGISTER (FLAGS)
The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits that describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these
bits, FLAGS.7−FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions; two others FLAGS.3 and
FLAGS.2 are used for BCD arithmetic.
The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank
address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed. FLAGS register
can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load instruction.
Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags register. For
example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the AND
instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then simultaneously, two write will
occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result.
System Flags Register (FLAGS)
D5H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Bank address
status flag (BA)
Carry flag (C)
Zero flag (Z)
Sign flag (S)
Overflow flag (V)
Fast interrupt
status flag (FIS)
Half-carry flag (H)
Decimal adjust flag (D)
Figure 6-1. System Flags Register (FLAGS)
6-6
LSB
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
FLAG DESCRIPTIONS
C
Carry Flag (FLAGS.7)
The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to
the bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations, it contains the last value shifted out of the
specified register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag.
Z
Zero Flag (FLAGS.6)
For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. For
operations that test register bits, and for shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is
logic zero.
S
Sign Flag (FLAGS.5)
Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the
result. A logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number.
V
Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4)
The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than
– 128. It is also cleared to "0" following logic operations.
D
Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3)
The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations, so that a
subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by
programmers, and cannot be used as a test condition.
H
Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2)
The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows
out of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous
addition or subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is seldom accessed directly by a
program.
FIS
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1)
The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing.
When set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET
instruction is executed.
BA
Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0)
The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected,
bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when you execute the SB0 instruction and
is set to "1" (select bank 1) when you execute the SB1 instruction.
6-7
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET NOTATION
Table 6-2. Flag Notation Conventions
Flag
Description
C
Carry flag
Z
Zero flag
S
Sign flag
V
Overflow flag
D
Decimal-adjust flag
H
Half-carry flag
0
Cleared to logic zero
1
Set to logic one
*
Set or cleared according to operation
−
Value is unaffected
x
Value is undefined
Table 6-3. Instruction Set Symbols
Symbol
dst
Destination operand
src
Source operand
@
Indirect register address prefix
PC
Program counter
IP
Instruction pointer
FLAGS
RP
Flags register (D5H)
Register pointer
#
Immediate operand or register address prefix
H
Hexadecimal number suffix
D
Decimal number suffix
B
Binary number suffix
opc
6-8
Description
Opcode
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-4. Instruction Notation Conventions
Notation
cc
Description
Actual Operand Range
Condition code
See list of condition codes in Table 6-6.
r
Working register only
Rn (n = 0−15)
rb
Bit (b) of working register
Rn.b (n = 0−15, b = 0−7)
r0
Bit 0 (LSB) of working register
Rn (n = 0−15)
rr
Working register pair
RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14)
R
Register or working register
reg or Rn (reg = 0−255, n = 0−15)
Rb
Bit 'b' of register or working register
reg.b (reg = 0−255, b = 0−7)
RR
Register pair or working register pair
reg or RRp (reg = 0−254, even number only, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
IA
Indirect addressing mode
addr (addr = 0–254, even number only)
Ir
Indirect working register only
@Rn (n = 0−15)
IR
Indirect register or indirect working register @Rn or @reg (reg = 0−255, n = 0−15)
Irr
Indirect working register pair only
@RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
Indirect register pair or indirect working
register pair
@RRp or @reg (reg = 0−254, even only, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
Indexed addressing mode
#reg [Rn] (reg = 0−255, n = 0−15)
XS
Indexed (short offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range −128 to +127, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
xl
Indexed (long offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range 0−65535, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
da
Direct addressing mode
addr (addr = range 0−65535)
ra
Relative addressing mode
addr (addr = number in the range +127 to −128 that is
an offset relative to the address of the next instruction)
im
Immediate addressing mode
#data (data = 0−255)
iml
Immediate (long) addressing mode
#data (data = range 0−65535)
IRR
X
6-9
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
−
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
U
0
DEC
R1
DEC
IR1
ADD
r1,r2
ADD
r1,Ir2
ADD
R2,R1
ADD
IR2,R1
ADD
R1,IM
BOR
r0–Rb
P
1
RLC
R1
RLC
IR1
ADC
r1,r2
ADC
r1,Ir2
ADC
R2,R1
ADC
IR2,R1
ADC
R1,IM
BCP
r1.b, R2
P
2
INC
R1
INC
IR1
SUB
r1,r2
SUB
r1,Ir2
SUB
R2,R1
SUB
IR2,R1
SUB
R1,IM
BXOR
r0–Rb
E
3
JP
IRR1
SRP/0/1
IM
SBC
r1,r2
SBC
r1,Ir2
SBC
R2,R1
SBC
IR2,R1
SBC
R1,IM
BTJR
r2.b, RA
R
4
DA
R1
DA
IR1
OR
r1,r2
OR
r1,Ir2
OR
R2,R1
OR
IR2,R1
OR
R1,IM
LDB
r0–Rb
5
POP
R1
POP
IR1
AND
r1,r2
AND
r1,Ir2
AND
R2,R1
AND
IR2,R1
AND
R1,IM
BITC
r1.b
N
6
COM
R1
COM
IR1
TCM
r1,r2
TCM
r1,Ir2
TCM
R2,R1
TCM
IR2,R1
TCM
R1,IM
BAND
r0–Rb
I
7
PUSH
R2
PUSH
IR2
TM
r1,r2
TM
r1,Ir2
TM
R2,R1
TM
IR2,R1
TM
R1,IM
BIT
r1.b
B
8
DECW
RR1
DECW
IR1
PUSHUD
IR1,R2
PUSHUI
IR1,R2
MULT
R2,RR1
MULT
IR2,RR1
MULT
IM,RR1
LD
r1, x, r2
B
9
RL
R1
RL
IR1
POPUD
IR2,R1
POPUI
IR2,R1
DIV
R2,RR1
DIV
IR2,RR1
DIV
IM,RR1
LD
r2, x, r1
L
A
INCW
RR1
INCW
IR1
CP
r1,r2
CP
r1,Ir2
CP
R2,R1
CP
IR2,R1
CP
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xL
E
B
CLR
R1
CLR
IR1
XOR
r1,r2
XOR
r1,Ir2
XOR
R2,R1
XOR
IR2,R1
XOR
R1,IM
LDC
r2, Irr2, xL
C
RRC
R1
RRC
IR1
CPIJE
Ir,r2,RA
LDC
r1,Irr2
LDW
RR2,RR1
LDW
IR2,RR1
LDW
RR1,IML
LD
r1, Ir2
H
D
SRA
R1
SRA
IR1
CPIJNE
Irr,r2,RA
LDC
r2,Irr1
CALL
IA1
LD
IR1,IM
LD
Ir1, r2
E
E
RR
R1
RR
IR1
LDCD
r1,Irr2
LDCI
r1,Irr2
LD
R2,R1
LD
R2,IR1
LD
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xs
X
F
SWAP
R1
SWAP
IR1
LDCPD
r2,Irr1
LDCPI
r2,Irr1
CALL
IRR1
LD
IR2,R1
CALL
DA1
LDC
r2, Irr1, xs
6-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference (Continued)
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
−
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
0
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NEXT
P
1
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
ENTER
P
2
EXIT
E
3
WFI
R
4
SB0
5
SB1
N
6
IDLE
I
7
B
8
DI
B
9
EI
L
A
RET
E
B
IRET
C
RCF
H
D
E
E
X
F
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
STOP
SCF
CCF
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NOP
6-11
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CONDITION CODES
The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under
which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal"
after a compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-6.
The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump
instructions.
Table 6-6. Condition Codes
Binary
Mnemonic
Description
Flags Set
0000
F
Always false
−
1000
T
Always true
−
0111 (note)
C
Carry
C=1
1111 (note)
NC
No carry
C=0
0110 (note)
Z
Zero
Z=1
1110 (note)
NZ
Not zero
Z=0
1101
PL
Plus
S=0
0101
MI
Minus
S=1
0100
OV
Overflow
V=1
1100
NOV
No overflow
V=0
0110
(note)
EQ
Equal
Z=1
1110
(note)
NE
Not equal
Z=0
1001
GE
Greater than or equal
(S
XOR
V) = 0
0001
LT
Less than
(S
XOR
V) = 1
1010
GT
Greater than
(Z
OR (S
XOR
V)) = 0
OR (S
XOR
V)) = 1
0010
LE
Less than or equal
(Z
1111
(note)
UGE
Unsigned greater than or equal
C=0
0111
(note)
ULT
Unsigned less than
C=1
1011
UGT
Unsigned greater than
(C = 0
0011
ULE
Unsigned less than or equal
(C
OR
AND
Z = 0) = 1
Z) = 1
NOTES:
1. It indicates condition codes that are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For
example, Z and EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used;
after a CP instruction, however, EQ would probably be used.
2. For operations involving unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used.
6-12
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
This section contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the SAM8
instruction set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for fast referencing. The
following information is included in each instruction description:
•
Instruction name (mnemonic)
•
Full instruction name
•
Source/destination format of the instruction operand
•
Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation
•
Textual description of the instruction's effect
•
Specific flag settings affected by the instruction
•
Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s)
•
Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction
6-13
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADC — Add with carry
ADC
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
+
src
+
c
The source operand, along with the setting of the carry flag, is added to the destination operand
and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two'scomplement addition is performed. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the
carry from the addition of low-order operands to be carried into the addition of high-order
operands.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result
is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
cleared otherwise.
Format:
opc
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
12
r
r
6
13
r
lr
6
14
R
R
6
15
R
IR
6
16
R
IM
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
Bytes
dst
dst
3
src
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 =
and register 03H = 0AH:
3
03H, C flag =
"1", register 01H
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
20H, register 02H
ADC
R1,R2
→
R1
=
14H, R2
=
03H
ADC
R1,@R2
→
R1
=
1BH, R2
=
03H
ADC
01H,02H
→
Register 01H
=
24H, register 02H
=
03H
ADC
01H,@02H
→
Register 01H
=
2BH, register 02H
=
03H
ADC
01H,#11H
→
Register 01H
=
32H
=
03H,
In the first example, destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1",
and the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1,R2" adds
03H and the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in register R1.
6-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ADD
INSTRUCTION SET
— Add
ADD
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
+
src
The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination.
The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the
result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred.
Format:
opc
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
02
r
r
6
03
r
lr
6
04
R
R
6
05
R
IR
6
06
R
IM
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
Bytes
dst
dst
3
src
3
Addr Mode
src
dst
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
ADD
R1,R2
→
R1
=
15H, R2
=
03H
ADD
R1,@R2
→
R1
=
1CH, R2
=
03H
ADD
01H,02H
→
Register 01H
=
24H, register 02H
=
03H
ADD
01H,@02H
→
Register 01H
=
2BH, register 02H
=
03H
ADD
01H,#25H
→
Register 01H
=
46H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working register
R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1,R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H in
register R1.
6-15
INSTRUCTION SET
AND
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
— Logical AND
AND
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
AND
src
The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the
destination. The AND operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits
in the two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the
source are unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always cleared to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
52
r
r
6
53
r
lr
6
54
R
R
6
55
R
IR
6
56
R
IM
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
Bytes
dst
dst
3
src
3
Given: R1 = 12H, R2
=
AND
R1,R2
→
R1
=
02H, R2
AND
R1,@R2
→
R1
=
02H, R2 =
AND
01H,02H
→
Register 01H
=
01H, register 02H
=
03H
AND
01H,@02H
→
Register 01H
=
00H, register 02H
=
03H
AND
01H,#25H
→
Register 01H
=
21H
Addr Mode
src
dst
03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
=
03H
03H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source
working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1,R2" logically ANDs the source
operand 03H with the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in register R1.
6-16
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BAND
INSTRUCTION SET
— Bit AND
BAND
dst,src.b
BAND
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0)
←
dst(0)
AND
src(b)
dst(b)
AND
src(0)
or
dst(b)
←
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of
the destination (or source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Cleared to "0".
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
67
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
67
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits,
the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 05H:
BAND R1,01H.1
→
R1
BAND 01H.1,R1
→
Register 01H
=
06H, register 01H =
=
05H, R1
05H
=
07H
In the first example, source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and destination
working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1,01H.1" ANDs the bit
1 value of the source register ("0") with the bit 0 value of register R1 (destination), leaving the
value 06H (00000110B) in register R1.
6-17
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BCP — Bit Compare
BCP
dst,src.b
Operation:
dst(0) – src(b)
The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination.
The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both
operands are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise.
Cleared to "0".
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
6
17
src
Addr Mode
src
dst
r0
Rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
BCP
=
07H and register 01H
R1,01H.1
→
R1
=
=
01H:
07H, register 01H
=
01H
If destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register
01H contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1,01H.1" compares bit one of
the source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are
not identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H).
6-18
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BITC
INSTRUCTION SET
— Bit Complement
BITC
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ←
NOT dst(b)
This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other
bits in the destination.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Cleared to "0".
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
57
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
BITC
R1.1
=
07H
→
R1
=
05H
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1"
complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in register R1.
Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is
cleared.
6-19
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BITR — Bit Reset
BITR
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b)
←
0
The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits
in the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
BITR
R1.1
=
07H:
→
R1
=
05H
If the value of working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR
one of the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B).
6-20
R1.1" clears bit
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
BITS — Bit Set
BITS
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b)
←
1
The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in
the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 1
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b'
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
BITS
R1.3
=
07H:
→
R1
=
0FH
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS
three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B).
R1.3" sets bit
6-21
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BOR — Bit OR
BOR
dst,src.b
BOR
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0)
←
dst(0)
OR
src(b)
dst(b)
OR
src(0)
or
dst(b)
←
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the
destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination.
No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Cleared to "0".
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
07
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
07
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits,
the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit.
Examples:
Given: R1
=
07H and register 01H
=
03H:
BOR
R1, 01H.1
→
R1 = 07H, register 01H = 03H
BOR
01H.2, R1
→
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and
source register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1,01H.1" logically ORs
bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value
(07H) in working register R1.
In the second example, destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the
source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2,R1" logically
ORs bit two of register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H
in register 01H.
6-22
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTJRF
INSTRUCTION SET
— Bit Test, Jump Relative on False
BTJRF
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "0", then PC
←
PC
+
dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
10
37
(Note 1)
opc
src | b | 0
dst
Addr Mode
dst
src
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
=
07H:
BTJRF SKIP,R1.3
→
PC jumps to SKIP location
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP,R1.3"
tests bit 3. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the
memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the
allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-23
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTJRT — Bit Test, Jump Relative on True
BTJRT
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "1", then PC
←
PC
+
dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
10
37
(Note 1)
opc
src | b | 1
dst
Addr Mode
dst
src
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1
BTJRT
=
07H:
SKIP,R1.1
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP,R1.1"
tests bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the
PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the
memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-24
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
BXOR — Bit XOR
BXOR
dst,src.b
BXOR
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0)
←
dst(0)
XOR
src(b)
dst(b)
XOR
src(0)
or
dst(b)
←
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB)
of the destination (or source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Cleared to "0".
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
27
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
27
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits,
the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1
=
07H (00000111B) and register 01H
BXOR R1,01H.1
→
R1
BXOR 01H.2,R1
→
Register 01H
=
=
03H (00000011B):
06H, register 01H
=
07H, R1
=
=
03H
07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and source
register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1,01H.1" exclusive-ORs
bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). The result bit value is stored in
bit zero of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of source register 01H is
unaffected.
6-25
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CALL — Call Procedure
CALL
dst
Operation:
SP
@SP
SP
@SP
PC
←
←
←
←
←
SP – 1
PCL
SP –1
PCH
dst
The current contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program
counter value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The
specified destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first
instruction of a procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used
to return to the original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program
counter.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
3
14
F6
DA
dst
opc
dst
2
12
F4
IRR
opc
dst
2
14
D4
IA
1A47H, and SP
=
Given: R0
CALL
=
35H, R1
3521H →
SP
= 21H, PC
=
=
0002H:
0000H
(Memory locations 0000H
=
1AH, 0001H
=
4AH, where
4AH is the address that follows the instruction.)
CALL
@RR0 →
CALL
#40H
→
SP = 0000H (0000H
SP
=
=
0000H (0000H
1AH, 0001H
=
=
1AH, 0001H
49H)
=
49H)
In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the
value 0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the
stack. The stack pointer now points to memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the
value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed.
If the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, the
statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack
location 0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with
the value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed.
Assuming that the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first
example, if program address 0040H contains 35H and program address 0041H contains 21H, the
statement "CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example.
6-26
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
CCF — Complement Carry Flag
CCF
Operation:
C
←
NOT
C
The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic
zero; if C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one.
Flags:
C: Complemented.
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Given: The carry flag
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
EF
"0":
CCF
If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H),
changing its value from logic zero to logic one.
6-27
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CLR — Clear
CLR
dst
Operation:
dst
←
"0"
The destination location is cleared to "0".
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
4FH, register 01H
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
B0
R
4
B1
IR
02H, and register 02H
CLR
00H
→
Register 00H
=
00H
CLR
@01H →
Register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
=
=
5EH:
00H
In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H
value to 00H. In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR)
addressing mode to clear the 02H register value to 00H.
6-28
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
COM — Complement
COM
dst
Operation:
dst
←
NOT
dst
The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement); all "1s" are
changed to "0s", and vice-versa.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always reset to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
60
R
4
61
IR
dst
Given: R1
=
07H and register 07H
=
0F1H:
COM
R1
→
R1
=
0F8H
COM
@R1
→
R1
=
07H, register 07H
=
0EH
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The
statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros,
and vice-versa, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B).
In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value
of destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B).
6-29
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CP — Compare
CP
dst,src
Operation:
dst – src
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the
appropriate flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the
comparison.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
dst
1. Given: R1
CP
=
dst
R1,R2 →
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
A2
r
r
6
A3
r
lr
6
A4
R
R
6
A5
R
IR
6
A6
R
IM
3
src
02H and R2
Bytes
3
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
03H:
Set the C and S flags
Destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and source register R2 contains the value
03H. The statement "CP R1,R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1 value
(destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, C and S are
"1".
2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH:
SKIP
CP
JP
INC
LD
R1,R2
UGE,SKIP
R1
R3,R1
In this example, destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the
contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1,R2" generates C = "1"
and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3,R1"
executes, the value 06H remains in working register R3.
6-30
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
CPIJE — Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal
CPIJE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst – src
Ir
←
Ir
=
+
"0", PC
←
PC
+
RA
1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0",
the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose
address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the
CPIJE instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the
next instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
dst
RA
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
12
C2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1
=
02H, R2
CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP →
=
03H, and register 03H
R2
=
=
02H:
04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
In this example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 the value 03H,
and register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP" compares the @R2 value
02H (00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the
relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by
SKIP. The source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that
the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-31
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CPIJNE — Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal
CPIJNE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst – src
Ir
←
Ir
"0", PC
+
←
PC
+
RA
1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not
"0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement
whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE
instruction is executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next
instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
dst
RA
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
12
D2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1
=
02H, R2
CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP →
=
03H, and register 03H
R2
=
=
04H:
04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
Working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 (the source pointer) the value
03H, and general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP" subtracts
04H (00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-equal, the
relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by
SKIP. The source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H.
(Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
6-32
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
DA — Decimal Adjust
DA
dst
Operation:
dst
←
DA
dst
The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or
subtraction operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table
indicates the operation performed. (The operation is undefined if the destination operand was not
the result of a valid addition or subtraction of BCD digits):
Instruction
Carry
Before DA
Bits 4–7
Value (Hex)
H Flag
Before DA
Bits 0–3
Value (Hex)
Number Added
to Byte
Carry
After DA
0
0–9
0
0–9
00
0
0
0–8
0
A–F
06
0
0
0–9
1
0–3
06
0
ADD
0
A–F
0
0–9
60
1
ADC
0
9–F
0
A–F
66
1
0
A–F
1
0–3
66
1
1
0–2
0
0–9
60
1
1
0–2
0
A–F
66
1
1
0–3
1
0–3
66
1
0
0–9
0
0–9
00
=
– 00
0
SUB
0
0–8
1
6–F
FA
=
– 06
0
SBC
1
7–F
0
0–9
A0
=
– 60
1
1
6–F
1
6–F
9A
=
– 66
1
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table).
Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
40
R
4
41
IR
6-33
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DA — Decimal Adjust
DA
(Continued)
Example:
Given: Working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), working register R1 contains
27 (BCD), and address 27H contains 46 (BCD):
ADD
DA
R1,R0
R1
;
;
C ← "0", H ← "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = C, R1 ← 3CH
R1 ← 3CH + 06
If addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is
incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using
standard binary arithmetic:
0001
+ 0010
0011
0101
0111
15
27
1100=
3CH
The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained:
0011
+ 0000
1100
0110
0100
0010=
42
Assuming the same values given above, the statements
SUB
27H,R0 ;
C ← "0", H ← "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = 1
DA
@R1
@R1 ← 31–0
;
leave the value 31 (BCD) in address 27H (@R1).
6-34
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
DEC — Decrement
DEC
dst
Operation:
dst
←
dst – 1
The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
00
R
4
01
IR
dst
Given: R1
=
03H and register 03H
DEC
R1
→
R1
DEC
@R1
→
Register 03H
=
=
10H:
02H
=
0FH
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1"
decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the
statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by
one, leaving the value 0FH.
6-35
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DECW — Decrement Word
DECW
dst
Operation:
dst
←
dst – 1
The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand
following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
21H:
dst
Given: R0
=
12H, R1
=
34H, R2
DECW RR0
→
R0
DECW @R2
→
Register 30H
=
=
12H, R1
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
80
RR
8
81
IR
30H, register 30H
=
= 0FH, and register 31H
=
33H
0FH, register 31H
=
20H
In the first example, destination register R0 contains the value 12H and register R1 the value
34H. The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word
and decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H.
NOTE:
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW
instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use DECW as shown in the following
example:
LOOP: DECW RR0
6-36
LD
R2,R1
OR
R2,R0
JR
NZ,LOOP
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
DI — Disable Interrupts
DI
Operation:
SYM (0)
←
0
Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all
interrupt processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits,
but the CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Given: SYM
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
8F
01H:
DI
If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the
register and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing.
Before changing IMR, interrupt pending and interrupt source control register, be sure DI state.
6-37
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DIV — Divide (Unsigned)
DIV
dst,src
Operation:
dst
÷
dst
(UPPER)
←
REMAINDER
dst
(LOWER)
←
QUOTIENT
src
The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits)
is stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of
the destination. When the quotient is ≥ 28, the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of
the destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned
integers.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if the V flag is set and quotient is between 28 and 29 –1; cleared otherwise.
Set if divisor or quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if MSB of quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise.
Set if quotient is ≥ 28 or if divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
26/10
94
RR
R
26/10
95
RR
IR
26/10
96
RR
IM
dst
Addr Mode
src
dst
NOTE: Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero is attempted; otherwise it takes 26 cycles.
Examples:
Given: R0
=
10H, R1
=
03H, R2
=
40H, register 40H
DIV
RR0,R2
→
R0
=
03H, R1
=
40H
DIV
RR0,@R2
→
R0
=
03H, R1
=
20H
DIV
RR0,#20H
→
R0
=
03H, R1
=
80H
=
80H:
In the first example, destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H
(R1), and register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0,R2" divides the 16-bit
RR0 value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the
value 03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination
register RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1).
6-38
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
DJNZ — Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero
DJNZ
r,dst
Operation:
r
←
If
r
r
–
1
≠ 0, PC
←
PC
+
dst
The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are
not logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and
control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative
address is +127 to –128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the
instruction byte following the DJNZ statement.
NOTE: In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at
the one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0, or SRP1 instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
r
|
opc
dst
2
Cycles
8
8
Example:
Given: R1
=
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
(jump taken)
rA
RA
(no jump)
r = 0 to F
02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address:
SRP
#0C0H
DJNZ
R1,LOOP
DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the
destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, working register
R1 contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address.
The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H.
Because the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative
address specified by the LOOP label.
6-39
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
EI — Enable Interrupts
EI
Operation:
SYM (0)
←
1
An EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to
be serviced as they occur (assuming they have highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was
set while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced
when you execute the EI instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Given: SYM
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
9F
00H:
EI
If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the
statement "EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for
global interrupt processing.)
6-40
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
ENTER — Enter
ENTER
Operation:
SP
@SP
IP
PC
IP
←
←
←
←
←
SP – 2
IP
PC
@IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the
instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the
instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is
loaded into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
14
1F
opc
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an ENTER statement.
Before
Address
IP
After
Data
Address
0050
IP
Address
PC
0040
SP
0022
22
Data
Stack
40
41
42
43
Data
0043
Data
Enter
Address H
Address L
Address H
Memory
1F
01
10
Address
PC
0110
SP
0020
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
40
41
42
43
00
50
110
Data
Enter
Address H
Address L
Address H
1F
01
10
Routine
Memory
Stack
6-41
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
EXIT — Exit
EXIT
Operation:
←
←
←
←
IP
SP
PC
IP
@SP
SP + 2
@IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is
popped and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by
the instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is
incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
14 (internal stack)
2F
opc
16 (internal stack)
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an EXIT statement.
Before
Address
After
Data
IP
0050
PC
0040
Address
Address
50
51
SP
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
Stack
6-42
00
50
IP
0052
PC
0060
Data
PCL old
PCH
Exit
Memory
Address
60
00
0022
140
Data
60
SP
0022
22
Data
Data
Main
2F
Stack
Memory
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
IDLE — Idle Operation
IDLE
Operation:
The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing system clock oscillation to continue. Idle
mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation.
In application programs, a IDLE instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP
instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next
instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after IDLE instruction,
leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
6F
Addr Mode
dst
src
–
–
The instruction
IDLE
NOP
NOP
NOP
;
stops the CPU clock but not the system clock
6-43
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INC — Increment
INC
dst
Operation:
dst
←
dst
+
1
The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
dst
|
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
1
4
rE
r
opc
r = 0 to F
opc
Examples:
Given: R0
dst
=
2
1BH, register 00H
=
INC
R0
→
R0
INC
00H
→
Register 00H
INC
@R0
→
R0
=
=
4
20
R
4
21
IR
0CH, and register 1BH
=
0FH:
1CH
=
0DH
1BH, register 01H
=
10H
In the first example, if destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement "INC
R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register.
The next example shows the effect an INC instruction has on register 00H, assuming that it
contains the value 0CH.
In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the
value of register 1BH from 0FH to 10H.
6-44
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
INCW — Increment Word
INCW
dst
Operation:
dst
←
dst
+
1
The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that
location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
A0
RR
8
A1
IR
dst
Given: R0
=
1AH, R1
=
02H, register 02H
INCW RR0
→
R0
INCW @R1
→
Register 02H
=
1AH, R1
=
=
0FH, and register 03H
=
0FFH:
= 03H
10H, register 03H
=
00H
In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in register R0 and 02H
in register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the
value 03H in register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect
Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the contents of general register 03H from 0FFH to
00H and register 02H from 0FH to 10H.
NOTE:
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an
INCW instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use INCW as shown in the
following example:
LOOP:
INCW
LD
OR
JR
RR0
R2,R1
R2,R0
NZ,LOOP
6-45
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IRET — Interrupt Return
IRET
IRET (Normal)
Operation:
FLAGS
SP ←
PC ←
SP ←
SYM(0)
← @SP
SP + 1
@SP
SP + 2
← 1
IRET (Fast)
PC ↔ IP
FLAGS ← FLAGS'
FIS ← 0
This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and
the program counter. It also re-enables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the
fast interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast
interrupt occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine.
Flags:
All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred).
Format:
IRET
(Normal)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
10 (internal stack)
BF
12 (internal stack)
Example:
IRET
(Fast)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
6
BF
In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before
interrupts are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and instruction pointer are
swapped. This causes the PC to jump to address 100H and the IP to keep the return address.
The last instruction in the service routine normally is a jump to IRET at address FFH. This causes
the instruction pointer to be loaded with 100H "again" and the program counter to jump back to
the main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H.
0H
FFH
100H
IRET
Interrupt
Service
Routine
JP to FFH
FFFFH
NOTE:
6-46
In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay
attention to the order of the last two instructions. The IRET cannot be immediately proceded by a
clearing of the interrupt status (as with a reset of the IPR register).
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
JP — Jump
JP
cc,dst
(Conditional)
JP
dst
(Unconditional)
Operation:
If
cc
is true, PC
←
dst
The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the
condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true; otherwise, the instruction following the JP
instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the
contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the
PC.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format: (1)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
3
8
ccD
DA
(2)
cc
|
opc
dst
cc = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
8
30
IRR
NOTES:
1. The 3-byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2-byte format for an unconditional jump.
2. In the first byte of the three-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the
opcode are both four bits.
Examples:
Given: The carry flag (C)
=
"1", register 00
=
01H, and register 01
JP
C,LABEL_W
→
LABEL_W
JP
@00H
→
PC
=
=
1000H, PC
=
=
20H:
1000H
0120H
The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement
"JP C,LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to
that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement
immediately following the JP instruction.
The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the
contents of the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H.
6-47
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
JR — Jump Relative
JR
cc,dst
Operation:
If
cc
is true, PC
←
PC
+
dst
If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the
program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program
counter; otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See list of condition
codes).
The range of the relative address is +127, –128, and the original value of the program counter
is taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
6
ccB
RA
(1)
cc
|
opc
dst
cc = 0 to F
NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each
four bits.
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X
JR
C,LABEL_X
→
PC
=
=
1FF7H:
1FF7H
If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is true), the statement "JR C,LABEL_X" will
pass control to the statement whose address is now in the PC. Otherwise, the program
instruction following the JR would be executed.
6-48
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
LD — Load
LD
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
src
The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
dst
src
|
|
opc
src
opc
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
rC
r
IM
4
r8
r
R
4
r9
R
r
2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r = 0 to F
opc
dst
opc
|
src
src
opc
dst
dst
opc
2
src
src
3
3
4
C7
r
lr
4
D7
Ir
r
6
E4
R
R
6
E5
R
IR
6
E6
R
IM
6
D6
IR
IM
dst
3
6
F5
IR
R
opc
dst
|
src
x
3
6
87
r
x [r]
opc
src
|
dst
x
3
6
97
x [r]
r
6-49
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LD — Load
LD
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H,
register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and register 3AH = 0FFH:
6-50
LD
R0,#10H
→
R0
=
10H
LD
R0,01H
→
R0
=
20H, register 01H = 20H
LD
01H,R0
→
Register 01H
LD
R1,@R0
→
R1
=
20H, R0
=
01H
LD
@R0,R1
→
R0
=
01H, R1
=
0AH, register 01H = 0AH
LD
00H,01H
→
Register 00H
=
20H, register 01H = 20H
LD
02H,@00H
→
Register 02H
=
20H, register 00H = 01H
LD
00H,#0AH
→
Register 00H
=
0AH
LD
@00H,#10H
→
Register 00H
=
01H, register 01H = 10H
LD
@00H,02H
→
Register 00H
=
01H, register 01H = 02, register 02H = 02H
LD
R0,#LOOP[R1] →
R0
LD
#LOOP[R0],R1 →
Register 31H
=
=
0FFH, R1
=
01H, R0 = 01H
=
0AH
0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
LDB — Load Bit
LDB
dst,src.b
LDB
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0)
←
src(b)
or
dst(b)
←
src(0)
The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the
source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are
affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
47
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
47
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit
address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R0
=
06H and general register 00H
=
05H:
LDB
R0,00H.2
→
R0
=
07H, register 00H
=
05H
LDB
00H.0,R0
→
R0
=
06H, register 00H
=
04H
In the first example, destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source
general register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0,00H.2" loads the bit two value of the
00H register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in register R0.
In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0,R0" loads bit
zero of register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in general
register 00H.
6-51
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC/LDE
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
src
This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa.
The source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The
assembler makes 'Irr' or 'rr' values an even number for program memory and odd an odd number
for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
1.
opc
dst | src
2
10
C3
r
Irr
2.
opc
src | dst
2
10
D3
Irr
r
3.
opc
dst | src
XS
3
12
E7
r
XS [rr]
4.
opc
src | dst
XS
3
12
F7
XS [rr]
r
5.
opc
dst | src
XLL
XLH
4
14
A7
r
XL [rr]
6.
opc
src | dst
XLL
XLH
4
14
B7
XL [rr]
r
7.
opc
dst | 0000
DAL
DAH
4
14
A7
r
DA
8.
opc
src | 0000
DAL
DAH
4
14
B7
DA
r
9.
opc
dst | 0001
DAL
DAH
4
14
A7
r
DA
10.
opc
src | 0001
DAL
DAH
4
14
B7
DA
r
NOTES:
1.
The source (src) or working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use register pair 0–1.
2.
For formats 3 and 4, the destination address 'XS [rr]' and the source address 'XS [rr]' are each
one byte.
3.
For formats 5 and 6, the destination address 'XL [rr] and the source address 'XL [rr]' are each two
bytes.
4.
The DA and r source values for formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory; the
second set of values, used in formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory.
6-52
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC/LDE
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H; Program memory locations
0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H. External data memory
locations 0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H:
LDC
R0,@RR2
; R0
; R0
← contents of program memory location 0104H
= 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDE
R0,@RR2
; R0
; R0
← contents of external data memory location 0104H
= 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDC (note) @RR2,R0
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
; location 0104H (RR2),
; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change
LDE
@RR2,R0
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 0104H (RR2),
; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change
LDC
R0,#01H[RR2]
; R0
← contents of program memory location 0105H
; (01H + RR2),
; R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDE
R0,#01H[RR2]
; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 0105H
; (01H + RR2), R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDC (note) #01H[RR2],R0
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
; 0105H (01H + 0104H)
LDE
#01H[RR2],R0
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 0105H (01H + 0104H)
LDC
R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 ← contents of program memory location 1104H
; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDE
R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 ← contents of external data memory location 1104H
; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
LDC
R0,1104H
; R0
←
LDE
R0,1104H
; R0
; R0
← contents of external data memory location 1104H,
= 98H
contents of program memory location 1104H, R0=88H
LDC (note) 1105H,R0
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
; 1105H, (1105H) ← 11H
LDE
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 1105H, (1105H) ← 11H
1105H,R0
NOTE: These instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices.
6-53
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LDCD/LDED — Load Memory and Decrement
LDCD/LDED
dst,src
Operation:
dst
rr
←
←
src
rr – 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data
memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register
pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory
address is then decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCD references program memory and LDED references external data memory. The assembler
makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
10
E2
dst | src
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Irr
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and external
data memory location 1033H = 0DDH:
LDCD
R8,@RR6
; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one
; R8
LDED
R8,@RR6
=
0CDH, R6
=
10H, R7
=
32H (RR6
RR6 – 1)
; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one (RR6
; R8
6-54
←
=
0DDH, R6
=
10H, R7
=
32H
←
RR6 – 1)
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCI/LDEI — Load Memory and Increment
LDCI/LDEI
dst,src
Operation:
dst
rr
←
←
src
rr
+
1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data
memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register
pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory
address is then incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes
'Irr' even for program memory and odd for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
10
E3
dst | src
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Irr
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and
1034H = 0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H:
LDCI
R8,@RR6
; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6
; R8
LDEI
R8,@RR6
=
0CDH, R6
=
10H, R7
=
←
RR6 + 1)
34H
; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6
; R8
=
0DDH, R6
=
10H, R7
=
←
RR6 + 1)
34H
6-55
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LDCPD/LDEPD — Load Memory with Pre-Decrement
LDCPD/
LDEPD
dst,src
Operation:
rr
dst
←
←
rr
–
1
src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location.
The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
6-56
src | dst
Given: R0
=
77H, R6
=
30H, and R7
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
14
F2
Addr Mode
dst
src
Irr
r
00H:
LDCPD
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ← RR6 – 1)
77H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
2FFFH (3000H – 1H)
R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
LDEPD
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ← RR6 – 1)
77H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H)
R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCPI/LDEPI — Load Memory with Pre-Increment
LDCPI/
LDEPI
dst,src
Operation:
rr
dst
←
←
rr
+
1
src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src | dst
Given: R0
=
7FH, R6
=
21H, and R7
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
14
F3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Irr
r
0FFH:
LDCPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ← RR6 + 1)
7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H)
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
LDEPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ← RR6 + 1)
7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H)
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
6-57
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LDW — Load Word
LDW
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
src
The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source
are unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
opc
Examples:
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
C4
RR
RR
8
C5
RR
IR
8
C6
RR
IML
dst
src
4
Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, register 00H
register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0FH:
Addr Mode
dst
src
=
1AH,
LDW
RR6,RR4
→
R6
LDW
00H,02H
→
Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 0FH,
register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0FH
LDW
RR2,@R7
→
R2
LDW
04H,@01H
→
Register 04H
LDW
RR6,#1234H
→
R6
LDW
02H,#0FEDH
→
Register 02H
=
=
=
06H, R7
03H, R3
=
12H, R7
=
=
=
1CH, R4
=
=
1CH
0FH,
03H, register 05H
=
06H, R5
=
0FH
=
0EDH
34H
0FH, register 03H
In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of
the source word 02H, 03H into the destination word 00H, 01H. This leaves the value 03H in
general register 00H and the value 0FH in register 01H.
The other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and
formats.
6-58
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
MULT — Multiply (Unsigned)
MULT
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst ×
src
The 8-bit destination operand (even register of the register pair) is multiplied by the source
operand (8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the destination
address. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if result is > 255; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise.
Cleared.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src
Given: Register 00H
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
22
84
RR
R
22
85
RR
IR
22
86
RR
IM
dst
=
20H, register 01H = 03H, register 02H
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
09H, register 03H = 06H:
MULT
00H, 02H
→
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 09H
MULT
00H, @01H
→
Register 00H
=
00H, register 01H
MULT
00H, #30H
→
Register 00H
=
06H, register 01H =
=
0C0H
00H
In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H,02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in
the register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H). The
16-bit product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H.
6-59
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
NEXT — Next
NEXT
Operation:
PC
IP
←
←
@ IP
IP
+
2
The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program
memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter. The
instruction pointer is then incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
10
0F
opc
Example:
The following diagram shows one example of how to use the NEXT instruction.
Before
Address
IP
After
Data
Address
0043
IP
Address
PC
0120
43
44
45
120
Data
Address H
Address L
Address H
Next
Memory
6-60
Data
0045
01
10
Address
PC
0130
43
44
45
130
Data
Address H
Address L
Address H
Routine
Memory
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
NOP — No Operation
NOP
Operation:
No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are
executed in sequence in order to effect a timing delay of variable duration.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
FF
When the instruction
NOP
is encountered in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there is a delay in instruction
execution time.
6-61
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
OR — Logical OR
OR
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
OR
src
The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being
stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1"; otherwise a "0" is
stored.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always cleared to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
42
r
r
6
43
r
lr
6
44
R
R
6
45
R
IR
6
46
R
IM
dst | src
src
dst
dst
3
src
3
Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2
37H, and register 08H = 8AH:
=
01H, register 00H
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
08H, register 01H
OR
R0,R1
→
R0
=
3FH, R1
=
2AH
OR
R0,@R2
→
R0
=
37H, R2
=
01H, register 01H
OR
00H,01H
→
Register 00H
=
3FH, register 01H
=
37H
OR
01H,@00H
→
Register 00H
=
08H, register 01H
=
0BFH
OR
00H,#02H
→
Register 00H
=
0AH
=
=
37H
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 15H and register R1 the value 2AH,
the statement "OR R0,R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result
(3FH) in destination register R0.
The other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with the various addressing
modes and formats.
6-62
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
POP — Pop From Stack
POP
dst
Operation:
dst
←
@SP
SP
←
SP
+
1
The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The
stack pointer is then incremented by one.
Flags:
No flags affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
50
R
8
51
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H = 01H, register 01H
0FBH, and stack register 0FBH = 55H:
=
1BH, SPH (0D8H)
POP
00H
→
Register 00H
=
55H, SP
POP
@00H
→
Register 00H
=
01H, register 01H
=
=
00H, SPL (0D9H)
=
00FCH
=
55H, SP
=
00FCH
In the first example, general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H"
loads the contents of location 00FBH (55H) into destination register 00H and then increments the
stack pointer by one. Register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP points to location
00FCH.
6-63
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
POPUD — Pop User Stack (Decrementing)
POPUD
dst,src
Operation:
dst
IR
←
←
src
IR – 1
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file
location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack
pointer is then decremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
src
dst
Given: Register 00H =
register 02H = 70H:
POPUD
02H,@00H
→
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
92
42H (user stack pointer register), register 42H
Register 00H
=
=
Addr Mode
dst
src
R
IR
6FH, and
41H, register 02H = 6FH, register 42H = 6FH
If general register 00H contains the value 42H and register 42H the value 6FH, the statement
"POPUD 02H,@00H" loads the contents of register 42H into the destination register 02H. The
user stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H.
6-64
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
POPUI — Pop User Stack (Incrementing)
POPUI
dst,src
Operation:
dst
IR
←
←
src
IR + 1
The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the
register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user
stack pointer is then incremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
src
Given: Register 00H
POPUI
02H,@00H
dst
=
01H and register 01H
→
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
93
=
Addr Mode
dst
src
R
IR
70H:
Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 70H, register 02H = 70H
If general register 00H contains the value 01H and register 01H the value 70H, the statement
"POPUI 02H,@00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user
stack pointer (register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H.
6-65
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PUSH — Push To Stack
PUSH
src
Operation:
SP
←
@SP
SP
←
–
1
src
A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src)
into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new
value to the top of the stack.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8 (internal clock)
70
R
71
IR
8 (external clock)
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
Examples:
Given: Register 40H
=
4FH, register 4FH
=
0AAH, SPH
=
00H, and SPL
=
00H:
PUSH
40H
→
Register 40H = 4FH, stack register 0FFH
SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
PUSH
@40H
→
Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, stack register
0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
=
4FH,
In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and general register 40H the
value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It
then loads the contents of register 40H into location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top
of the stack.
6-66
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
PUSHUD — Push User Stack (Decrementing)
PUSHUD
dst,src
Operation:
IR
dst
←
←
IR
–1
src
This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements
the user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the
decremented stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
dst
Given: Register 00H
PUSHUD @00H,01H
src
=
→
03H, register 01H
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
82
05H, and register 02H
=
Addr Mode
dst
src
IR
R
1AH:
Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 05H, register 02H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUD @00H,01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H. The
01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user
stack pointer.
6-67
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PUSHUI — Push User Stack (Incrementing)
PUSHUI
dst,src
Operation:
IR
dst
←
←
IR
+
1
src
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user
stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by
the incremented user stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
dst
Given: Register 00H
PUSHUI
@00H,01H
src
=
→
03H, register 01H
=
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
83
05H, and register 04H
=
Addr Mode
dst
src
IR
R
2AH:
Register 00H = 04H, register 01H = 05H, register 04H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUI @00H,01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H
register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack
pointer.
6-68
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
RCF — Reset Carry Flag
RCF
RCF
Operation:
C
←
0
The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value.
Flags:
C:
Cleared to "0".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Given: C = "1"
or
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
CF
"0":
The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero.
6-69
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RET — Return
RET
Operation:
PC
←
@SP
SP
←
SP
+
2
The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executing procedure at the end of
a procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack
pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement that is executed is the one that
is addressed by the new program counter value.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
8 (internal stack)
AF
10 (internal stack)
Example:
Given: SP
RET
→
=
00FCH, (SP)
PC
=
=
101AH, and PC
101AH, SP
=
=
1234:
00FEH
The statement "RET" pops the contents of stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte
of the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in location 00FEH (1AH) into the
PC's low byte and the instruction at location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points to
memory location 00FEH.
6-70
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
RL — Rotate Left
RL
dst
Operation:
C
←
dst (7)
dst (0) ←
dst (7)
dst (n
1)
+
←
dst (n),
n
=
0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is
moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag.
7
0
C
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
90
R
4
91
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
0AAH, register 01H
=
02H and register 02H
RL
00H
→
Register 00H
=
55H, C
RL
@01H
→
Register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
=
=
17H:
"1"
=
2EH, C
=
"0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B)
and setting the carry and overflow flags.
6-71
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RLC — Rotate Left Through Carry
RLC
dst
Operation:
dst (0) ←
C
←
dst (n
C
dst (7)
+
1)
← dst (n), n
=
0–6
The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The
initial value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C); the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero.
7
0
C
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
10
R
4
11
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
0AAH, register 01H
=
02H, and register 02H
RLC
00H
→
Register 00H
=
54H, C
RLC
@01H
→
Register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
=
=
17H, C
=
"0":
"1"
=
2EH, C
= "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RLC 00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of bit 7 sets the carry flag
and the initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of register 00H, leaving the value 55H
(01010101B). The MSB of register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag.
6-72
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
RR — Rotate Right
RR
dst
Operation:
C
←
dst (7)
dst (0)
←
dst (n) ←
dst (0)
dst (n
+
1), n
=
0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit
zero (LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C).
7
0
C
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
E0
R
4
E1
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
31H, register 01H
=
02H, and register 02H
RR
00H
→
Register 00H
=
98H, C
RR
@01H
→
Register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
=
=
17H:
"1"
=
8BH, C
=
"1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement
"RR 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to
bit 7, leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also
resets the C flag to "1" and the sign flag and overflow flag are also set to "1".
6-73
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RRC — Rotate Right Through Carry
RRC
dst
Operation:
dst (7)
C
←
dst (n)
←
C
dst (0)
←
dst (n
+
1), n
=
0–6
The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The
initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag; the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit 7
(MSB).
7
0
C
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
C0
R
4
C1
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
55H, register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
RRC
00H
→
Register 00H
=
2AH, C
RRC
@01H
→
Register 01H
=
02H, register 02H
=
=
17H, and C
=
"0":
"1"
=
0BH, C
=
"1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement
"RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1")
replaces the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new
value 2AH (00101010B) in destination register 00H. The sign flag and overflow flag are both
cleared to "0".
6-74
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
SB0 — Select Bank 0
SB0
Operation:
BANK ←
0
The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero,
selecting bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
4F
The statement
SB0
clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting bank 0 register addressing.
6-75
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SB1 — Select Bank 1
SB1
Operation:
BANK
← 1
The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one,
selecting bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. (Bank 1 is not
implemented in some S3C8-series microcontrollers.)
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
5F
The statement
SB1
sets FLAGS.0 to "1", selecting bank 1 register addressing, if implemented.
6-76
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
SBC — Subtract with Carry
SBC
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
–
src
–
c
The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the
destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are
unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to
the destination operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry
("borrow") from the subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of
high-order operands.
Flags:
Set if a borrow occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the sign
of the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
set otherwise, indicating a "borrow".
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
32
r
r
6
33
r
lr
6
34
R
R
6
35
R
IR
3
6
36
R
IM
"1", register 01H
=
20H, register 02H
dst | src
src
dst
dst
3
src
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 =
and register 03H = 0AH:
03H, C
=
Addr Mode
dst
src
=
03H,
SBC
R1,R2
→
R1
=
0CH, R2
=
03H
SBC
R1,@R2
→
R1
=
05H, R2
=
03H, register 03H
SBC
01H,02H
→
Register 01H
=
1CH, register 02H
SBC
0AH
01H,@02H
→
Register 01H
=
15H,register 02H
=
03H, register 03H
SBC
01H,#8AH
→
Register 01H
=
95H; C, S, and V
=
"1"
=
=
0AH
03H
=
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 10H and register R2 the value 03H,
the statement "SBC R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from the
destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in register R1.
6-77
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SCF — Set Carry Flag
SCF
Operation:
C ←
1
The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value.
Flags:
C: Set to "1".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
The statement
SCF
sets the carry flag to logic one.
6-78
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
DF
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
SRA — Shift Right Arithmetic
SRA
dst
Operation:
dst (7)
C
←
dst (n)
←
dst (7)
dst (0)
←
dst (n
+
1), n
=
0–6
An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the
LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into bit
position 6.
7
6
0
C
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1".
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Always cleared to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
D0
R
4
D1
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
9AH, register 02H
=
03H, register 03H
SRA
00H
→
Register 00H
=
0CD, C
SRA
@02H
→
Register 02H
=
03H, register 03H
=
=
0BCH, and C
=
=
0DEH, C
"0"
"1":
"0"
=
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement
"SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C
flag and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the
value 0CDH (11001101B) in destination register 00H.
6-79
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SRP/SRP0/SRP1 — Set Register Pointer
SRP
src
SRP0
src
SRP1
src
Operation:
If src (1)
=
1 and src (0)
=
0 then:
RP0 (3–7)
←
src (3–7)
If src (1)
=
0 and src (0)
=
1 then:
RP1 (3–7)
←
src (3–7)
If src (1)
=
0 and src (0)
=
0 then:
RP0 (4–7)
←
src (4–7),
RP0 (3)
←
0
RP1 (4–7)
←
src (4–7),
RP1 (3)
←
1
The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register
pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3–7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register
pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
2
4
31
IM
The statement
SRP
#40H
sets register pointer 0 (RP0) at location 0D6H to 40H and register pointer 1 (RP1) at location
0D7H to 48H.
The statement "SRP0
68H.
6-80
#50H" sets RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1
#68H" sets RP1 to
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
STOP — Stop Operation
STOP
Operation:
The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the
microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers,
peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be
released by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the
RESET pin must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has
elapsed.
In application programs, a STOP instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP
instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next
instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after STOP instruction,
leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
7F
Addr Mode
dst
src
–
–
The statement
STOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
;
halts all microcontroller operations
6-81
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SUB — Subtract
SUB
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
– src
The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the
two's complement of the source operand to the destination operand.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the
sign of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
set otherwise indicating a "borrow".
Format:
opc
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
22
r
r
6
23
r
lr
6
24
R
R
6
25
R
IR
6
26
R
IM
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
Bytes
dst
dst
Given: R1
= 0AH:
=
3
src
12H, R2
=
3
03H, register 01H
=
21H, register 02H
=
03H, register 03H
SUB
R1,R2
→
R1
=
0FH, R2
=
03H
SUB
R1,@R2
→
R1
=
08H, R2
=
03H
SUB
01H,02H
→
Register 01H
=
1EH, register 02H
=
03H
SUB
01H,@02H
→
Register 01H
=
17H, register 02H
=
03H
SUB
01H,#90H
→
Register 01H
=
91H; C, S, and V
SUB
01H,#65H
→
Register 01H
=
0BCH; C and S
=
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
"1"
"1", V
=
"0"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 12H and if register R2 contains the
value 03H, the statement "SUB R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination
value (12H) and stores the result (0FH) in destination register R1.
6-82
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
SWAP — Swap Nibbles
SWAP
dst
Operation:
dst (0
–
3)
↔
dst (4
– 7)
The contents of the lower four bits and upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped.
7
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
4 3
0
Undefined.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Undefined.
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
F0
R
4
F1
IR
dst
Given: Register 00H
=
3EH, register 02H
=
03H, and register 03H
SWAP
00H
→
Register 00H
=
0E3H
SWAP
@02H
→
Register 02H
=
03H, register 03H
=
=
0A4H:
4AH
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement
"SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the
value 0E3H (11100011B).
6-83
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
TCM — Test Complement Under Mask
TCM
dst,src
Operation:
(NOT dst)
AND
src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand
(mask). The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the
source mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and
source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always cleared to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
62
r
r
6
63
r
lr
6
64
R
R
6
65
R
IR
6
66
R
IM
dst | src
src
dst
dst
3
src
3
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2
02H, and register 02H = 23H:
=
12H, register 00H
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
2BH, register 01H
TCM
R0,R1
→
R0
=
0C7H, R1
=
02H, Z
TCM
R0,@R1
→
R0
=
0C7H, R1
=
02H, register 02H
TCM
00H,01H
→
Register 00H
2BH, register 01H
=
02H, Z
TCM
00H,@01H
→
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H
register 02H = 23H, Z = "1"
=
02H,
TCM
00H,#34
→
Register 00H
=
=
2BH, Z
=
=
=
"1"
=
23H, Z
=
=
"0"
"1"
"0"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1
the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register
for a "1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one
and can be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation.
6-84
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
TM — Test Under Mask
TM
dst,src
Operation:
dst
AND
src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand
(mask), which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to
determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always reset to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
72
r
r
6
73
r
lr
6
74
R
R
6
75
R
IR
6
76
R
IM
dst | src
src
dst
dst
3
src
3
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2
02H, and register 02H = 23H:
=
18H, register 00H
=
2BH, register 01H
TM
R0,R1
→
R0
=
0C7H, R1
=
02H, Z
TM
R0,@R1
→
R0
=
0C7H, R1
=
02H, register 02H
TM
00H,01H
→
Register 00H
TM
00H,@01H
→
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H =
register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
TM
00H,#54H
→
Register 00H
=
=
=
=
=
"0"
2BH, register 01H
2BH, Z
Addr Mode
src
dst
=
=
23H, Z
02H, Z
=
=
"0"
"0"
02H,
"1"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1
the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register
for a "0" value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic
zero and can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation.
6-85
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
WFI — Wait for Interrupt
WFI
Operation:
The CPU is effectively halted until an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take
place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a
fast interrupt.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4n
3F
opc
(n
Example:
=
1, 2, 3, … )
The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI"
statement:
Main program
.
.
.
EI
WFI
(Next instruction)
(Enable global interrupt)
(Wait for interrupt)
.
.
.
Interrupt occurs
Interrupt service routine
.
.
.
Clear interrupt flag
IRET
Service routine completed
6-86
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
INSTRUCTION SET
XOR — Logical Exclusive OR
XOR
dst,src
Operation:
dst
←
dst
XOR
src
The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is
stored in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever
the corresponding bits in the operands are different; otherwise, a "0" bit is stored.
Flags:
C:
Z:
S:
V:
D:
H:
Unaffected.
Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
Always reset to "0".
Unaffected.
Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
B2
r
r
6
B3
r
lr
6
B4
R
R
6
B5
R
IR
6
B6
R
IM
dst | src
src
dst
dst
3
src
3
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2
02H, and register 02H = 23H:
=
18H, register 00H
=
Addr Mode
src
dst
2BH, register 01H
=
XOR
R0,R1
→
R0
=
0C5H, R1
=
02H
XOR
R0,@R1
→
R0
=
0E4H, R1
=
02H, register 02H = 23H
XOR
00H,01H
→
Register 00H
=
29H, register 01H = 02H
XOR
00H,@01H
→
Register 00H
=
08H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H
XOR
00H,#54H
→
Register 00H
=
7FH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if register R1 contains
the value 02H, the statement "XOR R0,R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the R0
value and stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0.
6-87
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
7
CLOCK CIRCUIT
CLOCK CIRCUIT
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller has two oscillator circuits: a main clock and a sub clock circuit.
The CPU and peripheral hardware operate on the system clock frequency supplied through these circuits. The
maximum CPU clock frequency of S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X is determined by CLKCON register settings.
SYSTEM CLOCK CIRCUIT
The system clock circuit has the following components:
•
External crystal, ceramic resonator, RC oscillation source, or an external clock source
•
Oscillator stop and wake-up functions
•
Programmable frequency divider for the CPU clock (fxx divided by 1, 2, 8, or 16)
•
System clock control register, CLKCON
•
Oscillator control register, OSCCON and STOP control register, STPCON
•
Clock output control register, CLOCON
CPU Clock Notation
In this document, the following notation is used for descriptions of the CPU clock;
fx: main clock
fxt: sub clock
fxx: selected system clock
7-1
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
MAIN OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
SUB OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
32.768 kHz
XTIN
XIN
XTOUT
XOUT
104
VREG
Figure 7-1. Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fx)
Figure 7-4. Crystal Oscillator (fxt)
XTIN
XIN
XOUT
XTOUT
Figure 7-5. External Oscillator (fxt)
Figure 7-2. External Oscillator (fx)
XIN
R
XOUT
Figure 7-3. RC Oscillator (fx)
7-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CLOCK CIRCUIT
CLOCK STATUS DURING POWER-DOWN MODES
The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect the system clock as follows:
•
In stop mode, the main oscillator is halted. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator started, by a reset
operation or an external interrupt (with RC delay noise filter).
•
In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated to the CPU, but not to interrupt structure, timers and timer/
counters. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an external or internal interrupt.
Stop Release
INT
Main-System
Oscillator
Circuit
fx
fxt
Sub-system
Oscillator
Circuit
Watch Timer
LCD Controller
Selector 1
fXX
Stop
OSCCON.3
Stop
OSCCON.0
OSCCON.2
1/1-1/4096
STOP OSC
inst.
Basic Timer
Timer/Counters
STPCON
Watch Timer
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
LCD Controller
SIO
BLD
1/1
1/2
1/8
1/16
System Clock
CLKCON.4-.3
Selector 2
CPU Clock
IDLE Instruction
Figure 7-6. System Clock Circuit Diagram
7-3
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SYSTEM CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCON)
The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in the set 1, at address D4H. It is read/write addressable
and has the following functions:
•
Oscillator IRQ wake up function enable/disable
•
Oscillator frequency divide-by value
CLKCON register settings control whether or not an external interrupt can be used to trigger a stop mode release
(This is called the "IRQ wake-up" function). The IRQ "wake-up" enable bit is CLKCON.7.
After the main oscillator is activated, and the fxx/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If
necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock speed to fxx/8, fxx/2, or fxx/1.
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
D4H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
Oscillator IRQ wake-up function bit:
0 = Enable IRQ for main wake up in
power down mode
1 = Disable IRQ for main wake up in
power down mode
Not used for S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
(must keep always 0)
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used for S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
(must keep always 0)
Divide-by selection bits for
CPU clock frequency:
00 = fxx/16
01 = fxx/8
10 = fxx/2
11 = fxx/1 (non-divided)
Figure 7-7. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
7-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CLOCK CIRCUIT
CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER (CLOCON)
The clock output control register, CLOCON, is located in set 1 bank 1, at address E8H. It is read/write
addressable and has the following functions:
•
Clock output frequency selection
After a reset, fxx/64 is select for clock output frequency because the reset value of CLOCON.1−.0 is "00b".
Clock Output Control Register (CLOCON)
E8H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
Not used for S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
(must keep always "0")
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Clock output frequency selection bits:
00 = Select fxx/64
01 = Select fxx/16
10 = Select fxx/8
11 = Select fxx/4
Figure 7-8. Clock Output Control Register (CLOCON)
CLOCON.1-.0
P0CONH.5-.4
fxx/64
fxx/16
fxx/8
MUX
CLKOUT/P0.6
fxx/4
Figure 7-9. Clock Output Block Diagram
7-5
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER (OSCCON)
The oscillator control register, OSCCON, is located in set 1, bank 0, at address E0H. It is read/write addressable
and has the following functions:
•
System clock selection
•
Main oscillator control
•
Sub oscillator control
•
Sub oscillator circuit selection
OSCCON.0 register settings select Main clock or Sub clock as system clock.
After a reset, Main clock is selected for system clock because the reset value of OSCCON.0 is "0".
The main oscillator can be stopped or run by setting OSCCON.3.
The sub oscillator can be stopped or run by setting OSCCON.2.
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
E0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
NOTES:
1. The OSCCON.7 must be maintained to "1", during
the suboscillator operation.
2. A capacitor (0.1uF) should be connected between
VREG and GND.
LSB
System clock selection bit:
0 = Main oscillator select
1 = Sub oscillator select
Not used for S3C8275X/
C8278X/C8274X
Sub oscillator circuit selection bit:
0 = Initial state
1 = Power saving circuit for sub oscillator
(Automatically cleared to "0" when the sub
oscillator is stopped by OSCCON.2)
.0
Not used for S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Sub oscillator control bit:
0 = Sub oscillator RUN
1 = Sub oscillator STOP
Main oscillator control bit:
0 = Main oscillator RUN
1 = Main oscillator STOP
Figure 7-10. Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
7-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
CLOCK CIRCUIT
SWITCHING THE CPU CLOCK
Data loading in the oscillator control register, OSCCON, determine whether a main or a sub clock is selected as
the CPU clock, and also how this frequency is to be divided by setting CLKCON. This makes it possible to switch
dynamically between main and sub clocks and to modify operating frequencies.
OSCCON.0 select the main clock (fx) or the sub clock (fxt) for the CPU clock. OSCCON.3 start or stop main clock
oscillation, and OSCCON.2 start or stop sub clock oscillation. CLKCON.4−.3 control the frequency divider circuit,
and divide the selected fxx clock by 1, 2, 8, 16.
For example, you are using the default CPU clock (normal operating mode and a main clock of fx/16) and you
want to switch from the fx clock to a sub clock and to stop the main clock. To do this, you need to set CLKCON.4.3 to "11", OSCCON.0 to “1”, and OSCCON.3 to “1” simultaneously. This switches the clock from fx to fxt and
stops main clock oscillation.
The following steps must be taken to switch from a sub clock to the main clock: first, set OSCCON.3 to “0” to
enable main clock oscillation. Then, after a certain number of machine cycles has elapsed, select the main clock
by setting OSCCON.0 to “0”.
) PROGRAMMING TIP ⎯ Switching the CPU clock
1. This example shows how to change from the main clock to the sub clock:
MA2SUB
LD
OSCCON,#01H
; Switches to the sub clock
; Stop the main clock oscillation
RET
2. This example shows how to change from sub clock to main clock:
SUB2MA
DLY16
DEL
AND
CALL
AND
RET
SRP
LD
NOP
DJNZ
RET
OSCCON,#07H
DLY16
OSCCON,#06H
; Start the main clock oscillation
; Delay 16 ms
; Switch to the main clock
#0C0H
R0,#20H
R0,DEL
7-7
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
STOP Control Register (STPCON)
FBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
STOP control bits:
Other values = Disable STOP instruction
10100101 = Enable STOP instruction
NOTE:
Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as "10100101B".
Otherwise the STOP instuction will not execute as well as reset will be generated.
Figure 7-11. STOP Control Register (STPCON)
7-8
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
8
RESET and POWER-DOWN
SYSTEM RESET
OVERVIEW
During a power-on reset, the voltage at VDD goes to High level and the nRESET pin is forced to Low level. The
nRESET signal is input through a schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This
procedure brings the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X into a known operating status.
To allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize, the nRESET pin must be held to Low level for a
minimum time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance. The minimum required time of a reset
operation for oscillation stabilization is 1 millisecond.
Whenever a reset occurs during normal operation (that is, when both VDD and nRESET are High level), the
nRESET pin is forced Low level and the reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are
then reset to their default hardware values
In summary, the following sequence of events occurs during a reset operation:
•
All interrupt is disabled.
•
The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled.
•
Ports 0-6 are set to input mode, and all pull-up resistors are disabled for the I/O port.
•
Peripheral control and data register settings are disabled and reset to their default hardware values.
•
The program counter (PC) is loaded with the program reset address in the ROM, 0100H.
•
When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the instruction stored in ROM
location 0100H (and 0101H) is fetched and executed at normal mode by smart option.
•
The reset address of ROM can be changed by a smart option only in the S3F8275X (Full-Flash Device).
Refer to the chapter 16. Embedded Flash Memory Interface for more detail contents.
NORMAL MODE RESET OPERATION
In normal (masked ROM) mode, the Test pin is tied to VSS. A reset enables access to the 16/8/4-Kbyte on-chip
ROM (The external interface is not automatically configured).
NOTE
To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the
basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic
timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can
disable it by writing "1010B" to the upper nibble of BTCON.
8-1
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
HARDWARE RESET VALUES
Table 8-1, 8-2, 8-3 list the reset values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral
data registers following a reset operation. The following notation is used to represent reset values:
•
A "1" or a "0" shows the reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively.
•
An "x" means that the bit value is undefined after a reset.
•
A dash ("–") means that the bit is either not used or not mapped, but read 0 is the bit value.
Table 8-1. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1 Register and Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Hex
Bit Values After RESET
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Locations D0H – D2H are not mapped.
Basic timer control register
BTCON
211
D3H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CLKCON
212
D4H
0
−
−
0
0
−
−
−
FLAGS
213
D5H
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
Register pointer 0
RP0
214
D6H
1
1
0
0
0
−
−
−
Register pointer 1
RP1
215
D7H
1
1
0
0
1
−
−
−
Stack pointer (high byte)
SPH
216
D8H
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Stack pointer (low byte)
SPL
217
D9H
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction pointer (high byte)
IPH
218
DAH
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction pointer (low byte)
IPL
219
DBH
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Interrupt request register
IRQ
220
DCH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt mask register
IMR
221
DDH
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
System mode register
SYM
222
DEH
0
−
−
x
x
x
0
0
Register page pointer
PP
223
DFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
System clock control register
System flags register
8-2
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 8-2. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Bit Values After RESET
Dec
Hex
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Oscillator control register
OSCCON
224
E0H
0
−
−
−
0
0
−
0
SIO control register
SIOCON
225
E1H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SIO data register
SIODATA
226
E2H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SIOPS
227
E3H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (high byte)
P0CONH
228
E4H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (low byte)
P0CONL
229
E5H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P0PUR
230
E6H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 1 control register (high byte)
P1CONH
231
E7H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 1 control register (low byte)
P1CONL
232
E8H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P1PUR
233
E9H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (high byte)
P2CONH
234
EAH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (low byte)
P2CONL
235
EBH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P2PUR
236
ECH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 control register (high byte)
P3CONH
237
EDH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 control register (low byte)
P3CONL
238
EEH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P3PUR
239
EFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 data register
P0
240
F0H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 1 data register
P1
241
F1H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 2 data register
P2
242
F2H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 data register
P3
243
F3H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 4 data register
P4
244
F4H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 5 data register
P5
245
F5H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 6 data register
P6
246
F6H
−
−
−
−
0
0
0
0
EXTIPND
247
F7H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External interrupt control register (high byte) EXTICONH
248
F8H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External interrupt control register (low byte)
249
F9H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FBH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FDH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
SIO pre-scaler register
Port 0 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 1 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 2 pull-up resistor enable register
Port 3 pull-up resistor enable register
External interrupt pending register
EXTICONL
Location FAH is not mapped.
STOP control register
STPCON
251
Location FCH is not mapped.
Basic timer counter
BTCNT
253
Location FEH is not mapped.
Interrupt priority register
IPR
255
8-3
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 8-3. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Bit Values After RESET
Dec
Hex
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LCON
224
E0H
0
0
0
0
0
0
−
0
Watch timer control register
WTCON
225
E1H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A counter
TACNT
226
E2H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer B counter
TBCNT
227
E3H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A data register
TADATA
228
E4H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer B data register
TBDATA
229
E5H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 1/A control register
TACON
230
E6H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer B control register
TBCON
231
E7H
−
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Clock output control register
CLOCON
232
E8H
−
−
−
−
−
−
0
0
Port 4 control register (high byte)
P4CONH
233
E9H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 4 control register (low byte)
P4CONL
234
EAH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 5 control register (high byte)
P5CONH
235
EBH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 5 control register (low byte)
P5CONL
236
ECH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 6 control register
P6CON
237
EDH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LCD control register
Locations EEH – EFH are not mapped.
Flash memory control register
FMCON
240
F0H
0
0
0
0
0
−
−
0
Flash memory user programming enable register
FMUSR
241
F1H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register (high byte)
FMSECH
242
F2H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register (low byte)
FMSECL
243
F3H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Battery level detector control register
BLDCON
244
F4H
−
−
0
0
0
0
0
0
Locations F5H – FFH are not mapped.
8-4
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
POWER-DOWN MODES
STOP MODE
Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (opcode 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all
peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip main oscillator stops and the supply current is reduced to less than
3 µA. All system functions stop when the clock “freezes”, but data stored in the internal register file is retained.
Stop mode can be released in one of two ways: by a reset or by interrupts, for more details see Figure 7-7.
NOTE
Do not use stop mode if you are using an external clock source because XIN or XTIN input must be
restricted internally to VSS to reduce current leakage.
Using nRESET to Release Stop Mode
Stop mode is released when the nRESET signal is released and returns to high level: all system and peripheral
control registers are reset to their default hardware values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A
reset operation automatically selects a slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to
‘00B’. After the programmed oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU starts the system initialization
routine by fetching the program instruction stored in ROM location 0100H (and 0101H)
Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode. Which interrupt you can
use to release Stop mode in a given situation depends on the microcontroller’s current internal operating mode.
The external interrupts in the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X interrupt structure that can be used to release Stop
mode are:
•
External interrupts P0.0–P0.2 (INT0−INT2) and P1.3−P1.7 (INT3−INT7)
Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release:
•
If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt, the current values in system and peripheral control
registers are unchanged except STPCON register.
•
If you use an internal or external interrupt for Stop mode release, you can also program the duration of the
oscillation stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock settings before
entering Stop mode.
•
When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains
unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used.
•
The external interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following the IRET from the service
routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is executed.
How to Enter into Stop Mode
Handling STPCON register then writing Stop instruction (keep the order).
LD
STOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
STPCON, #10100101B
8-5
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IDLE MODE
Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In idle mode, CPU operations are halted while some
peripherals remain active. During idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated away from the CPU, but all
peripherals remain active. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time idle mode was entered.
There are two ways to release idle mode:
1. Execute a reset. All system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default values and the contents
of all data registers are retained. The reset automatically selects the slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.4
and CLKCON.3 are cleared to ‘00B’. If interrupts are masked, a reset is the only way to release idle mode.
2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release idle
mode, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock
value is used. The interrupt is then serviced. When the return-from-interrupt (IRET) occurs, the instruction
immediately following the one that initiated idle mode is executed.
8-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
9
I/O PORTS
I/O PORTS
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller has seven bit-programmable I/O ports, P0−P6. Port 0−port 5 are
8-bit ports, port 6 is 4-bit. This gives a total of 52 I/O pins. Each port can be flexibly configured to meet application
design requirements.
The CPU accesses ports by directly writing or reading port registers. No special I/O instructions are required. All
ports of the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X can be configured to input or output mode. P2−P6 are shared with LCD
signals.
Table 9-1 gives you a general overview of S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X I/O port functions.
Table 9-1. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Port Configuration Overview
Port
Configuration Options
0
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P0.0−P0.2 can be used as input for external interrupts INT and P0.3-P0.7 can be
used as T1CLK, TAOUT, TBOUT, CLKOUT, and BUZ.
1
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P1.3−P1.7 can be used as input for external interrupts INT and P1.0−P1.2 can be
used as SCK, SO, and SI.
2
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P2 can be used as outputs for LCD segment signals.
3
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P3 can be used as outputs for LCD segment signals.
4
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P4 can be used as outputs for LCD segment signals.
5
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternatively P5 can be used as outputs for LCD segment signals.
6
1-bit programmable I/O port.
Input or push-pull output and software assignable pull-ups.
Alternately P6.0−P6.3 can be used as outputs for LCD common signals.
9-1
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
PORT DATA REGISTERS
Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the register locations of all seven S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X I/O port data
registers. Data registers for ports 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 have the general format shown in Figure 9-1.
Table 9-2. Port Data Register Summary
Register Name
Mnemonic
Decimal
Hex
Location
R/W
Port 0 data register
P0
240
F0H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 1 data register
P1
241
F1H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 2 data register
P2
242
F2H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 3 data register
P3
243
F3H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 4 data register
P4
244
F4H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 5 data register
P5
245
F5H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
Port 6 data register
P6
246
F6H
Set 1, Bank 0
R/W
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X I/O Port Data Register Format (n = 0-6)
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Pn.7
Pn.6
Pn.5
Pn.4
Pn.3
Pn.2
Pn.1
Pn.0
LSB
Figure 9-1. S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X I/O Port Data Register Format
9-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 0
Port 0 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 0 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 0 data register, P0 at location F0H in set 1, bank 0. P0.0-P0.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P0.0−P0.3): INT0–INT2, T1CLK
•
High-nibble pins (P0.4−P0.7): TAOUT, TBOUT, CLKOUT, BUZ
Port 0 Control Registers (P0CONH, P0CONL)
Port 0 has two 8-bit control registers: P0CONH for P0.4−P0.7 and P0CONL for P0.0−P0.3. A reset clears the
P0CONH and P0CONL registers to "00H", configuring P0.0−P0.2 pins to input mode with interrupt and P0.3−P0.7
pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to select input or output mode (push-pull or open-drain) and
enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 0 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 0 Pull-up Resistor Control Register (P0PUR)
Using the port 0 pull-up resistor control register, P0PUR (E6H, set 1, bank 0) you can configure pull-up resistors
to individual port 0 pins.
Port 0 Interrupt Control Registers (EXTICONL.5−.0, EXTIPND.2−.0)
To process external interrupts at the port 0 pins, two additional control registers are provided: the external
interrupt control register EXTICONL.5−.0 (F9H, set 1, bank 0) and the external interrupt pending register
EXTIPND.2−.0 (F7H, set 1, bank 0)
The external interrupt pending register EXTIPND.2−.0 lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear
the pending condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects
interrupt requests by polling the EXTIPND.2−.0 register at regular intervals.
When the interrupt enable bit of any port 0 pin is "1", a rising or falling edge at that pin will generate an interrupt
request. The corresponding pending bit is then automatically set to "1" and the IRQ level goes low to signal the
CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software
must the clear the pending condition by writing a "0" to the corresponding EXTIPND bit.
9-3
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 0 Control Register, High Byte (P0CONH)
E4H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
P0.7/BUZ
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.4/TAOUT
P0CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Schmitt trigger input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function
(BUZ, CLKOUT, TBOUT, TAOUT)
Figure 9-2. Port 0 High-Byte Control Register (P0CONH)
Port 0 Control Register, Low Byte (P0CONL)
E5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P0.3/T1CLK
.5
.4
P0.2/INT2
.3
.2
P0.1/INT1
.1
.0
LSB
P0.0/INT0
P0CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Schmitt trigger input mode (T1CLK)
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Not available
Figure 9-3. Port 0 Low-Byte Control Register (P0CONL)
9-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
Port 0 Pull-up Control Register (P0PUR)
E6H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P0.7
P0.6
P0.5
P0.4
P0.3
P0.2
P0.1
P0.0
LSB
P0PUR bit configuration settings:
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE: A pull-up resistor of port 0 is automatically disabled when the
corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output or alternative
function.
Figure 9-4. Port 0 Pull-up Control Register (P0PUR)
External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)
E9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P1.3/INT3
.5
.4
P0.2/INT2
.3
.2
P0.1/INT1
.1
.0
LSB
P0.0/INT0
EXTICONL bit configuration settings:
00
Disable interrupt
01
10
Enable interrupt by falling edge
Enable interrupt by rising edge
11
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
Figure 9-5. External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)
9-5
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND)
F7H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P1.7 P1.6 P1.5 P1.4 P1.3 P0.2 P0.1 P0.0
(INT7) (INT6) (INT5) (INT4) (INT3) (INT2) (INT1) (INT0)
EXTIPND bit configuration settings:
0
No interrupt pending (when read), clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
Figure 9-6. External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND)
9-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 1 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 1 data register, P1 at location F1H in set 1, bank 0. P1.0−P1.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P1.0−P1.3): SCK, SO, SI, INT3
•
High-nibble pins (P1.4−P1.7): INT4−INT7
Port 1 Control Registers (P1CONH, P1CONL)
Port 1 has two 8-bit control registers: P1CONH for P1.4−P1.7 and P1CONL for P1.0−P1.3. A reset clears the
P1CONH and P1CONL registers to "00H", configuring P1.3−P1.7 pins to input mode with interrupt and P1.0−P1.2
pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to select input or output mode (push-pull or open-drain) and
enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 1 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 1 Pull-up Resistor Control Register (P1PUR)
Using the port 1 pull-up resistor control register, P1PUR (E9H, set 1, bank 0), you can configure pull-up resistors
to individual port 1 pins.
Port 1 Interrupt Control Registers (EXTICONH, EXTICONL.7−.6, EXTIPND.7−.3)
To process external interrupts at the port 1 pins, three additional control registers are provided: the external
interrupt control registers EXTICONH/EXTICONL.7−.6 (F8H/F9H, set 1, bank 0) and the external interrupt
pending register EXTIPND.7−.3 (F7H, set 1, bank 0).
The external interrupt pending register EXTIPND.7−.3 lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear
the pending condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects
interrupt requests by polling the EXTIPND.7−.3 register at regular intervals.
When the interrupt enable bit of any port 1 pin is "1", a rising or falling edge at that pin will generate an interrupt
request. The corresponding pending bit is then automatically set to "1" and the IRQ level goes low to signal the
CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software
must the clear the pending condition by writing a "0" to the corresponding EXTIPND bit.
9-7
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 1 Control Register, High Byte (P1CONH)
E7H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P1.7/INT7
.5
.4
P1.6/INT6
.3
.2
P1.5/INT5
.1
.0
LSB
P1.4/INT4
P1CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Schmitt trigger input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Not available
Figure 9-7. Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH)
Port 1 Control Register, Low Byte (P1CONL)
E8H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P1.3/INT3
.5
.4
P1.2/SI
.3
.2
P1.1/SO
.1
.0
LSB
P1.0/SCK
P1CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Schmitt trigger input mode (SI, SCK)
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SCK, SO)
Figure 9-8. Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL)
9-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUR)
E9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P1.7
P1.6
P1.5
P1.4
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1
P1.0
LSB
P1PUR bit configuration settings:
NOTE:
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
A pull-up resistor of port 1 is automatically disabled when the
corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output or alternative
function.
Figure 9-9. Port 1 Pull-up Control Register (P1PUR)
External Interrupt Control Register, High Byte (EXTICONH)
F8H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P1.7/INT7
.5
.4
P1.6/INT6
.3
.2
P1.5/INT5
.1
.0
LSB
P1.4/INT4
EXTICONH bit configuration settings:
00
Disable interrupt
01
10
Enable interrupt by falling edge
Enable interrupt by rising edge
11
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
Figure 9-10. External Interrupt Control Register, High Byte (EXTICONH)
9-9
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)
F9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P1.3/INT3
.5
.4
P0.2/INT2
.3
.2
P0.1/INT1
.1
.0
LSB
P0.0/INT0
EXTICONL bit configuration settings:
00
Disable interrupt
01
10
Enable interrupt by falling edge
Enable interrupt by rising edge
11
Enable interrupt by both falling and rising edge
Figure 9-11. External Interrupt Control Register, Low Byte (EXTICONL)
External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND)
F7H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P1.7 P1.6 P1.5 P1.4 P1.3 P0.2 P0.1 P0.0
(INT7) (INT6) (INT5) (INT4) (INT3) (INT2) (INT1) (INT0)
EXTIPND bit configuration settings:
0
No interrupt pending (when read), clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
Figure 9-12. External Interrupt Pending Register (EXTIPND)
9-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 2
Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 2 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 2 data register, P2 at location F2H in set 1, Bank 0. P2.0-P2.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P2.0-P2.3): SEG31−SEG28, VBLDREF
•
High-nibble pins (P2.4-P2.7): SEG27−SEG24
Port 2 Control Registers (P2CONH, P2CONL)
Port 2 has two 8-bit control registers: P2CONH for P2.4-P2.7 and P2CONL for P2.0-P2.3. A reset clears the
P2CONH and P2CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to
select input or output mode (push-pull or open-drain) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 2 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 2 Pull-up Resistor Control Register (P2PUR)
Using the port 2 pull-up resistor control register, P2PUR (ECH, set 1, bank 0), you can configure pull-up resistors
to individual port 2 pins.
Port 2 Control Register, High Byte (P2CONH)
EAH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P2.7/SEG24 P2.6/SEG25 P2.5/SEG26 P2.4/SEG27
P2CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG24-SEG27)
Figure 9-13. Port 2 High-byte Control Register (P2CONH)
9-11
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 2 Control Register, Low Byte (P2CONL)
EBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
P2.3/SEG28 P2.2/SEG29 P2.1/SEG30
.1
.0
LSB
P2.0/SEG31/VBLDREF
P2CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG28-SEG31/VBLDREF)
Figure 9-14. Port 2 Low-byte Control Register (P2CONL)
Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR)
ECH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P2.7
P2.6
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
LSB
P2PUR bit configuration settings:
NOTE:
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
A pull-up resistor of port 2 is automatically disabled when the
corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output or alternative
function.
Figure 9-15. Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR)
9-12
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 3
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 3 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 3 data register, P3 at location F3H in set 1, bank 0. P3.0-P3.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P3.0-P3.3): SEG23-SEG20
•
High-nibble pins (P3.4-P3.7): SEG19-SEG16
Port 3 Control Registers (P3CONH, P3CONL)
Port 3 has two 8-bit control registers: P3CONH for P3.4-P3.7 and P3CONL for P3.0-P3.3. A reset clears the
P3CONH and P3CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to
select input or output mode (push-pull or open-drain) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 3 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 3 Pull-up Resistor Control Register (P3PUR)
Using the port 3 pull-up resistor control register, P3PUR (EFH, set 1, bank 0), you can configure pull-up resistors
to individually port 3 pins.
Port 3 Control Register, High Byte (P3CONH)
EDH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P3.7/SEG16 P3.6/SEG17 P3.5/SEG18 P3.4/SEG19
P3CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative fumction (SEG16-SEG19)
Figure 9-16. Port 3 High Byte Control Register (P3CONH)
9-13
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 3 Control Register, Low Byte (P3CONL)
EEH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P3.3/SEG20 P3.2/SEG21 P3.1/SEG22 P3.0/SEG23
P3CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
N-channel open-drain output mode
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG20-SEG23)
Figure 9-17. Port 3 Low Byte Control Register (P3CONL)
Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR)
EFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
LSB
P3PUR bit configuration settings:
NOTE:
0
Disable pull-up resistor
1
Enable pull-up resistor
A pull-up resistor of port 3 is automatically disabled when the
corresponding pin is selected as push-pull output or alternative
function.
Figure 9-18. Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR)
9-14
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 4
Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 4 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 4 data register, P4 at location F4H in set 1, bank 0. P4.0-P4.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as push-pull output or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P4.0-P4.3): SEG15-SEG12
•
High-nibble pins (P4.4-P4.7): SEG11-SEG8
Port 4 Control Registers (P4CONH, P4CONL)
Port 4 has two 8-bit control registers: P4CONH for P4.4-P4.7 and P4CONL for P4.0-P4.3. A reset clears the
P4CONH and P4CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to
select input (with or without pull-up) or push-pull output mode and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 4 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 4 Control Register, High Byte (P4CONH)
E9H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P4.7/SEG8
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P4.6/SEG9 P4.5/SEG10 P4.4/SEG11
P4CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
Input with pull-up resistor
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG8-SEG11)
Figure 9-19. Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH)
9-15
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 4 Control Register, Low Byte (P4CONL)
EAH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
P4.3/SEG12 P4.2/SEG13 P4.1/SEG14 P4.0/SEG15
P4CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
Input with pull-up resistor
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG12-SEG15)
Figure 9-20. Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL)
9-16
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 5
Port 5 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 5 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 5 data register, P5 at location F5H in set 1, bank 0. P5.0-P5.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as push-pull output or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P5.0-P5.3): SEG7−SEG4
•
High-nibble pins (P5.4-P5.7): SEG3−SEG0
Port 5 Control Registers (P5CONH, P5CONL)
Port 5 has two 8-bit control registers: P5CONH for P5.4-P5.7 and P5CONL for P5.0-P5.3. A reset clears the
P5CONH and P5CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to
select input (with or without pull-up) or push-pull output mode and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 5 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 5 Control Register, High Byte (P5CONH)
EBH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P5.7/SEG0
.5
.4
P5.6/SEG1
.3
.2
P5.5/SEG2
.1
.0
LSB
P5.4/SEG3
P5CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
Input with pull-up resistor
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG0-SEG3)
Figure 9-21. Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH)
9-17
I/O PORTS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Port 5 Control Register, Low Byte (P5CONL)
ECH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P5.3/SEG4
.5
.4
P5.2/SEG5
.3
.2
P5.1/SEG6
.1
.0
LSB
P5.0/SEG7
P5CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
Input with pull-up resistor
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (SEG4-SEG7)
Figure 9-22. Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL)
9-18
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
I/O PORTS
PORT 6
Port 6 is a 4-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 6 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 6 data register, P6 at location F6H in set 1, bank 0. P6.0-P6.3 can serve as inputs (with or without pullup), as push-pull output or you can be configured the following functions.
•
Low-nibble pins (P6.0-P6.3): COM0−COM3
Port 6 Control Register (P6CON)
Port 6 has an 8-bit control register: P6CON for P6.0-P6.3. A reset clears the P6CON register to "00H", configuring
all pins to input mode. You use control register setting to select input (with or without pull-up) or push-pull output
mode and enable the alternative functions.
When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 6 control register must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 6 Control Register (P6CON)
EDH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
P6.3/COM3
.5
.4
P6.2/COM2
.3
.2
P6.1/COM1
.1
.0
LSB
P6.0/COM0
P6CON bit-pair pin configuration settings:
00
Input mode
01
Input with pull-up resistor
10
Push-pull output mode
11
Alternative function (COM3-COM0)
Figure 9-23. Port 6 Control Register (P6CON)
9-19
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
10
BASIC TIMER
BASIC TIMER
OVERVIEW
Basic timer (BT) can be used in two different ways:
•
As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction.
•
To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or a stop mode release.
The functional components of the basic timer block are:
•
Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 4096, 1024, 128, or 16) with multiplexer
•
8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH, read-only)
•
Basic timer control register, BTCON (set 1, D3H, read/write)
10-1
BASIC TIMER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BASIC TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (BTCON)
The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer
counter and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function. It is located in set 1,
address D3H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears BTCON to "00H". This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of
fxx/4096. To disable the watchdog function, you must write the signature code "1010B" to the basic timer register
control bits BTCON.7–BTCON.4.
The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH), can be cleared at any time during normal operation by
writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To clear the frequency dividers for all timers input clock, you write a "1" to BTCON.0.
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
D3H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
Watchdog function enable bits:
= Disable watchdog timer
1010B
Other values = Enable watchdog timer
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Divider clear bit for all timers:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear divider
Basic timer counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear BTCNT
Basic timer input clock selection bits:
00 = fXX/4096
01 = fXX/1024
10 = fXX/128
11 = fXX/16
Figure 10-1. Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
10-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BASIC TIMER
BASIC TIMER FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Watchdog Timer Function
You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a reset by setting BTCON.7−BTCON.4 to
any value other than "1010B". (The "1010B" value disables the watchdog function.) A reset clears BTCON to
"00H", automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A reset also selects the CPU clock (as determined by
the current CLKCON register setting), divided by 4096, as the BT clock.
A reset whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs. During normal operation, the application program must
prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occurring. To do this, the BTCNT value must
be cleared (by writing a "1" to BTCON.1) at regular intervals.
If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation
will not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a reset. In other words, during normal
operation, the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always
broken by a BTCNT clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a reset is triggered automatically.
Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function
You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval following a reset or when
stop mode has been released by an external interrupt.
In stop mode, whenever a reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts. The BTCNT
value then starts increasing at the rate of fxx/4096 (for reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an
internal and an external interrupt). When BTCNT.4 overflows, a signal is generated to indicate that the
stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the clock signal off to the CPU so that it can resume normal
operation.
In summary, the following events occur when stop mode is released:
1. During stop mode, a power-on reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs to trigger the stop mode
release and oscillation starts.
2. If a power-on reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fxx/4096. If an internal and an
external interrupt is used to release stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock
source.
3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows.
4. When a BTCNT.4 overflow occurs, normal CPU operation resumes.
10-3
BASIC TIMER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
RESET or STOP
Bit 1
Bits 3, 2
Basic Timer Control Register
(Write '1010xxxxB' to Disable)
Data Bus
fXX/4096
Clear
fXX/1024
fXX
DIV
fXX/128
MUX
8-Bit Up Counter
(BTCNT, Read-Only)
OVF
fXX/16
u
Start the CPU (note)
Bit 0
NOTE:
During a power-on reset operation, the CPU is idle during the required oscillation
stabilization interval (until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows).
Figure 10-2. Basic Timer Block Diagram
10-4
RESET
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
11
TIMER 1
TIMER 1
ONE 16-BIT TIMER MODE (TIMER 1)
The 16-bit timer 1 is used in one 16-bit timer or two 8-bit timers mode. If TACON.7 is set to "1", timer 1 is used as
a 16-bit timer. If TACON.7 is set to "0", timer 1 is used as two 8-bit timers.
•
One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1)
•
Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A and B)
OVERVIEW
The 16-bit timer 1 is a 16-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 1 has the interval timer mode by using the appropriate
TACON setting.
Timer 1 has the following functional components:
•
Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 512, 256, 64, 8, or 1, fxt, and T1CLK: External clock) with multiplexer
•
16-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA)
•
Timer 1 match interrupt (IRQ 0, vector F0H) generation
•
Timer 1 control register, TACON (set 1, bank 1, E6H, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Interval Timer Function
The timer 1 module can generate an interrupt, the timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT). T1INT belongs to the interrupt
level IRQ 0, and is assigned a separate vector address, F0H.
The T1INT pending condition should be cleared by software after IRQ 0 is serviced. The T1INT pending bit must
be cleared by the application sub-routine by writing a "0" to the TACON.0 pending bit.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the
timer 1 reference data registers, TADATA and TBDATA. The match signal generates a timer 1 match interrupt
and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 32H and 10H to TADATA and TBDATA, respectively, and 8EH to TACON, the
counter will increment until it reaches 3210H. At this point, the timer 1 interrupt request is generated, the counter
value is reset, and counting resumes.
11-1
TIMER 1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Timer 1 Control Register (TACON)
You use the timer 1 control register, TACON, to
•
Enable the timer 1 operating (interval timer)
•
Select the timer 1 input clock frequency
•
Clear the timer 1 counter, TACNT and TBCNT
•
Enable the timer 1 interrupt
•
Clear timer 1 interrupt pending conditions
TACON is located in set 1, bank 1, at address E6H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing
mode.
A reset clears TACON to "00H". This sets timer 1 to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency
of fxx/512, and disables timer 1 interrupt. You can clear the timer 1 counter at any time during the normal
operation by writing a "1" to TACON.3.
To enable the timer 1 interrupt (IRQ 0, vector F0H), you must write TACON.7, TACON.2, and TACON.1 to "1".
To generate the exact time interval, you should write TACON.3 and TACON.0 to "10B", which cleared counter
and interrupt pending bit. When the T1INT sub-routine is serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by
software by writing a "0" to the timer 1 interrupt pending bit, TACON.0.
Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON)
E6H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Timer 1 operating mode selection bit:
0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B)
1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1)
Timer 1 clock selection bits:
000 = fxx/512
001 = fxx/256
010 = fxx/64
011 = fxx/8
100 = fxx
101 = fxt (sub clock)
110 = T1CLK (external clock)
111 = Not available
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
No effect (when write)
Timer 1 interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer 1 counter operating enable bit:
0 = Disable counting operation
1 = Enable counting operation
Timer 1 counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer 1 counter (when write)
Figure 11-1. Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON)
11-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTCON.0
TIMER 1
TACON.6-.4
1/512
R
TACON.3
Data Bus
1/256
TACON.2
fxx
(XIN or XTIN)
DIV
1/64
1/8
1/1
fxt
M
U
LSB
TBCNT
MSB
Clear
TACNT
R
TACON.1
Match
X
16-Bit Comparator
TACON.0
T1CLK
T1INT
TAOUT
LSB
MSB
TBDATA TADATA
Buffer
Buffer
Match Signal
T1CLR
TBDATA TADATA
Data Bus
NOTE:
When one 16-bit timer mode (TACON.7 <- "1": Timer 1)
Figure 11-2. Timer 1 Block Diagram (One 16-bit Mode)
11-3
TIMER 1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
TWO 8-BIT TIMERS MODE (TIMER A and B)
OVERVIEW
The 8-bit timer A and B are the 8-bit general-purpose timers. Timer A and B have the interval timer mode by using
the appropriate TACON and TBCON setting, respectively.
Timer A and B have the following functional components:
•
Clock frequency divider with multiplexer
− fxx divided by 512, 256, 64, 8 or 1, fxt, and T1CLK (External clock) for timer A
− fxx divided by 512, 256, 64 or 8 and fxt for timer B
•
8-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA)
•
Timer A have I/O pin for match output (TAOUT)
•
Timer A match interrupt (IRQ 0, vector F0H) generation
•
Timer A control register, TACON (set 1, bank 1, E6H, read/write)
•
Timer B have I/O pin for match output (TBOUT)
•
Timer B match interrupt (IRQ 0, vector F2H) generation
•
Timer B control register, TBCON (set 1, bank 1, E7H, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Interval Timer Function
The timer A and B module can generate an interrupt: the timer A match interrupt (TAINT) and the timer B match
interrupt (TBINT). TAINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ 0, and is assigned a separate vector address, F0H.
TBINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ 0 and is assigned a separate vector address, F2H.
The TAINT and TBINT pending condition should be cleared by software after they are serviced.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the
TA or TB reference data registers, TADATA and TBDATA. The match signal generates corresponding match
interrupt (TAINT, vector F0H; TBINT, vector F2H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 10H to TBDATA, "0" to TACON.7, and 0EH to TBCON, the counter will
increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the TB interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and
counting resumes.
Timer A and B Control Register (TACON, TBCON)
You use the timer A and B control register, TACON and TBCON, to
•
Enable the timer A (interval timer mode) and B operating (interval timer mode)
•
Select the timer A and B input clock frequency
•
Clear the timer A and B counter, TACNT and TBCNT
•
Enable the timer A and B interrupts
•
Clear timer A and B interrupt pending conditions
11-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
TIMER 1
TACON and TBCON are located in set 1, bank 1, at address E6H and E7H, and is read/write addressable using
Register addressing mode.
A reset clears TACON to "00H". This sets timer A to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency
of fxx/512, and disables timer A interrupt. You can clear the timer A counter at any time during normal operation
by writing a "1" to TACON.3.
A reset clears TBCON to "00H". This sets timer B to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency
of fxx/512, and disables timer B interrupt. You can clear the timer B counter at any time during normal operation
by writing a "1" to TBCON.3.
To enable the timer A interrupt (TAINT) and timer B interrupt (TBINT), you must write TACON.7 to "0", TACON.2
(TBCON.2) and TACON.1 (TBCON.1) to "1". To generate the exact time interval, you should write TACON.3
(TBCON.3) and TACON.0 (TBCON.0), which cleared counter and interrupt pending bit. When the TAINT and
TBINT sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the
timer A and B interrupt pending bits, TACON.0 or TBCON.0.
Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON)
E6H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Timer A operating mode selection bit:
0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B)
1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1)
Timer A clock selection bits:
000 = fxx/512
001 = fxx/256
010 = fxx/64
011 = fxx/8
100 = fxx
101 = fxt (sub clock)
110 = T1CLK (external clock)
111 = Not available
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer A interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
No effect (when write)
Timer A interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer A counter operating enable bit:
0 = Disable counting operation
1 = Enable counting operation
Timer A counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer A counter (when write)
Figure 11-3. Timer 1/A Control Register (TACON)
11-5
TIMER 1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
E7H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Not used for
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Timer B clock selection bits:
000 = fxx/512
001 = fxx/256
010 = fxx/64
011 = fxx/8
100 = fxt (sub clock)
Others = Not available
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer B interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
No effect (when write)
Timer B interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer B counter operating enable bit:
0 = Disable counting operation
1 = Enable counting operation
Timer B counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer B counter (when write)
Figure 11-4. Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
11-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTCON.0
R
TIMER 1
TACON.6-.4
1/512
1/256
TACON.3
Data Bus
TACON.2
fxx
(XIN or XTIN)
DIV
1/64
M
1/8
U
1/1
X
LSB
MSB
TACNT
(8-Bit Up-Counter) R
TACON.1
Match
8-Bit Comparator
fxt
Clear
TACON.0
T1CLK
LSB
TAINT
TAOUT
MSB
TADATA Buffer
Match Signal
TACLR
TADATA Register
Data Bus
NOTE:
When two 8-bit timers mode (TACON.7 <- "0": Timer A)
Figure 11-5. Timer A Block Diagram (Two 8-bit Timers Mode)
11-7
TIMER 1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BTCON.0
R
TBCON.6-.4
1/512
1/256
fxx
(XIN or XTIN)
DIV
1/64
TBCON.3
Data Bus
M
U
1/8
TBCON.2
LSB
MSB
TBCNT
(8-Bit Up-Counter) R
X
TBCON.1
Match
8-Bit Comparator
fxt
Clear
LSB
TBCON.0
TBINT
TBOUT
MSB
TBDATA Buffer
Match Signal
TBCLR
TBDATA Register
Data Bus
NOTE:
When two 8-bit timers mode (TACON.7 <- "0": Timer B)
Figure 11-6. Timer B Block Diagram (Two 8-bit Timers Mode)
11-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
12
WATCH TIMER
WATCH TIMER
OVERVIEW
Watch timer functions include real-time and watch-time measurement and interval timing for the system clock. To
start watch timer operation, set bit 1 of the watch timer control register, WTCON.1 to "1".
And if you want to service watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ 2, vector F6H), then set the WTCON.6 to "1".
The watch timer overflow interrupt pending condition (WTCON.0) must be cleared by software in the application's
interrupt service routine by means of writing a "0" to the WTCON.0 interrupt pending bit.
After the watch timer starts and elapses a time, the watch timer interrupt pending bit (WTCON.0) is automatically
set to "1", and interrupt requests commence in 3.91ms, 0.25, 0.5 and 1-second intervals by setting Watch timer
speed selection bits (WTCON.3− .2).
The watch timer can generate a steady 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, or 4 kHz signal to BUZ output pin for Buzzer. By
setting WTCON.3 and WTCON.2 to "11b", the watch timer will function in high-speed mode, generating an
interrupt every 3.91 ms. High-speed mode is useful for timing events for program debugging sequences.
Also, you can select watch timer clock source by setting the WTCON.7 appropriately value.
The watch timer supplies the clock frequency for the LCD controller (fLCD ). Therefore, if the watch timer is
disabled, the LCD controller does not operate.
Watch timer has the following functional components:
•
Real Time and Watch-Time Measurement
•
Using a Main or Sub Clock Source (Main clock divided by 27(fx/128) or Sub clock(fxt))
•
Clock Source Generation for LCD Controller (fLCD )
•
I/O pin for Buzzer Output Frequency Generator (P0.7, BUZ)
•
Timing Tests in High-Speed Mode
•
Watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ 2, vector F6H) generation
•
Watch timer control register, WTCON (set 1, bank 1, E1H, read/write)
12-1
WATCH TIMER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
WATCH TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WTCON)
The watch timer control register, WTCON is used to select the input clock source, the watch timer interrupt time
and Buzzer signal, to enable or disable the watch timer function. It is located in set 1, bank 1 at address E1H, and
is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears WTCON to "00H". This disable the watch timer and select fx/128 as the watch timer clock.
So, if you want to use the watch timer, you must write appropriate value to WTCON.
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON)
E1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
Watch timer clock selection bit:
0 = Select main clock divided by 27 (fx/128)
1 = Select sub clock (fxt)
Watch timer INT Enable/Disable bit:
0 = Disable watch timer INT
1 = Enable watch timer INT
Buzzer signal selection bits:
00 = 0.5 kHz
01 = 1 kHz
10 = 2 kHz
11 = 4 kHz
.3
.2
.1
.0
Watch timer interrupt pending bit:
0 = Interrupt request is not pending
(Clear pending bit when write"0")
1 = Interrupt request is pending
Watch timer Enable/Disable bit:
0 = Disable watch timer;
clear frequency dividing circuits
1 = Enable watch timer
Watch timer speed selection bits:
00 = Set watch timer interrupt to 1 s
01 = Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5 s
10 = Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25 s
11 = Set watch timer interrupt to 3.91 ms
Figure 12-1. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON)
12-2
LSB
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
WATCH TIMER
WATCH TIMER CIRCUIT DIASGRAM
WTCON.7
BUZ (P0.7)
WT INT Enable
WTCON.6
WTCON.6
WTCON.5
8
MUX
WTCON.4
WTCON.3
WTCON.2
WTCON.1
WTINT
fW/64 (0.5 kHz)
fW/32 (1 kHz)
fW/16 (2 kHz)
fW/8 (4 kHz)
Enable/Disable
Selector
Circuit
WTCON.0
WTCON.0
(Pending Bit)
Clock
Selector
fW
32.768 kHz
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
fW/27
fW/213
fW/214
fW/215 (1 Hz)
fLCD = 2048 Hz
fxt
fx/128
fX = Main clock (where fx = 4.19 MHz)
fxt = Sub clock (32.768 kHz)
fW = Watch timer frequency
Figure 12-2. Watch Timer Circuit Diagram
12-3
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
13
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller can directly drive an up-to-128-dot (32 segments x 4 commons)
LCD panel. Its LCD block has the following components:
•
LCD controller/driver
•
Display RAM (00H−0FH of page 2) for storing display data
•
32 segment output pins (SEG0−SEG31)
•
4 common output pins (COM0−COM3)
•
Three LCD operating power supply pins (VLC0−VLC2)
•
LCD bias by Internal/External register
The LCD control register, LCON, is used to turn the LCD display on or off, to select LCD clock frequency, to
select bias and duty, and switch the current to the dividing resistor for the LCD display. Data written to the LCD
display RAM can be automatically transferred to the segment signal pins without program control.
When a sub clock is selected as the LCD clock source, the LCD display is enabled even in main clock stop or idle
mode.
VLC0-VLC2
Data BUS
3
8
LCD
Controller/
Driver
COM0-COM3
4
SEG0-SEG31
32
Figure 13-1. LCD Function Diagram
13-1
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LCD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SEG31/P2.0
Port
Latch
SEG/Port
Driver
SEG16/P3.7
SEG15/P4.0
Data BUS
SEG0/P5.7
LCD
Display
RAM
(200H-20FH)
fLCD
COM/Port
Driver
COM3/P6.3
COM2/P6.2
COM0/P6.0
Timing
Controller
LCON
LCD
Voltage
Controller
Figure 13-2. LCD Circuit Diagram
13-2
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD RAM ADDRESS AREA
RAM addresses of page 2 are used as LCD data memory. When the bit value of a display segment is "1", the
LCD display is turned on; when the bit value is "0", the display is turned off.
COM0 b0 b4
COM1 b1 b5
COM2 b2 b6
COM3 b3 b7
SEG30
SEG31
SEG28
SEG29
SEG26
SEG27
SEG8
SEG9
SEG6
SEG7
SEG4
SEG5
SEG2
SEG3
SEG0
SEG1
Display RAM data are sent out through segment pins SEG0−SEG31 using a direct memory access (DMA)
method that is synchronized with the fLCD signal. RAM addresses in this location that are not used for LCD
display can be allocated to general-purpose use.
b0 b4 b0 b4 b0 b4 b0 b4
b1 b5 b1 b5 b1 b5 b1 b5
b0 b4 b0 b4 b0 b4
b1 b5 b1 b5 b1 b5
b2 b6 b2 b6 b2 b6 b2 b6
b3 b7 b3 b7 b3 b7 b3 b7
b2 b6 b2 b6 b2 b6
b3 b7 b3 b7 b3 b7
200H 201H 202H 203H 204H
20DH 20EH 20FH
Figure 13-3. LCD Display Data RAM Organization
Table 13-1. LCD Clock Signal Frame Frequency
LCDCK Frequency (fLCD)
Static
1/2 Duty
1/3 Duty
1/4 Duty
64 Hz
64
32
21
16
128 Hz
128
64
43
32
256Hz
256
128
85
64
512 Hz
512
256
171
128
13-3
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LCD CONTROL REGISTER (LCON)
A LCON is located in set 1, bank 1, at address E0H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing
mode. It has the following control functions.
•
LCD duty and bias selection
•
LCD clock selection
•
LCD display control
•
Internal/External LCD dividing resistors selection
The LCON register is used to turn the LCD display on/off, to select duty and bias, to select LCD clock and control
the flow of the current to the dividing in the LCD circuit. Following a RESET, all LCON values are cleared to "0".
This turns off the LCD display, select 1/4 duty and 1/3 bias, select 64Hz for LCD clock, and Enable internal LCD
dividing resistors.
The LCD clock signal determines the frequency of COM signal scanning of each segment output. This is also
referred as the LCD frame frequency. Since the LCD clock is generated by watch timer clock (fw). The watch
timer should be enabled when the LCD display is turned on.
LCD Control Register (LCON)
E0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
Internal LCD dividing register enable bit:
0 = Enable internal LCD dividing resistors
1 = Disable internal LCD dividing resistors
LCD clock selection bits:
00 = fw/29 (64 Hz)
01 = fw/28 (128 Hz)
10 = fw/27 (256 Hz)
11 = fw/26 (512 Hz)
.0
LSB
LCD display control bit:
0 = Turn display off
(Turn off the P-Tr)
1 = Turn display on
(Turn on the P-Tr)
Not used for S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
LCD duty and bias selection bits:
000 = 1/4 duty, 1/3 bias
001 = 1/3 duty, 1/3 bias
010 = 1/3 duty, 1/2 bias
011 = 1/2 duty, 1/2 bias
1xx = Static
NOTES:
1. "x" means don't care.
2. When 1/2 bias is selected, the bias levels are set as V LC0, VLC1(VLC2), and VSS.
Figure 13-4. LCD Control Register (LCON)
13-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD VOLTAGE DIVIDING RESISTOR
Static and 1/3 Bias
1/2 Bias
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
VDD
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
VDD
LCON.0
LCON.7 = 0: Enable internal resistors
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
R
R
LCON.0
VLC1
VLCD
R
LCON.7 = 0: Enable internal resistors
VLC0
VLC2
R
R
VLCD
R
VSS
VSS
Voltage Dividing Resistor Adjustment
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
VDD
LCON.0
LCON.7 = 1: Disable internal resistors
VLC0
R'
R'
VLC1
VLC2
VLCD
R'
VSS
NOTES:
1. R = Internal LCD dividing resistors. The resistors can be disconnected by LCON.7.
2. R' = External LCD dividing resistors.
Figure 13-5. Internal Voltage Dividing Resistor Connection
13-5
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
COMMON (COM) SIGNALS
The common signal output pin selection (COM pin selection) varies according to the selected duty cycle.
•
In 1/4 duty mode, COM0-COM3 pins are selected
•
In 1/3 duty mode, COM0-COM2 pins are selected
•
In 1/2 duty mode, COM0-COM1 pins are selected
SEGMENT (SEG) SIGNALS
The 32 LCD segment signal pins are connected to corresponding display RAM locations at page 2. Bits of the
display RAM are synchronized with the common signal output pins.
When the bit value of a display RAM location is "1", a select signal is sent to the corresponding segment pin.
When the display bit is "0", a 'no-select' signal to the corresponding segment pin.
Select
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
COM
VLC0
VSS
SEG
VLC0
VSS
VLC0
VSS
-VLC0
COM-SEG
Figure 13-6. Select/No-Select Signals in Static Display Mode
13-6
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Select
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
VLC 0
VLC1, 2
COM
Vss
VLC 0
VLC1, 2
SEG
Vss
VLC 0
VLC1, 2
COM-SEG
Vss
-VLC1, 2
-VLC 0
Figure 13-7. Select/No-Select Signal in 1/2 Duty, 1/2 Bias Display Mode
Select
Non-Select
FR
1 Frame
COM
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
SEG
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
-VLC2
-VLC1
-VLC0
COM-SEG
Figure 13-8. Select/No-Select Signal in 1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode
13-7
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
3
SEG1.4 x C0
1 Frame
Figure 13-9. LCD Signals and Wave Forms Example in 1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias Display Mode
13-8
SEG5
0 1 1 0
.4 .5 .6 .7
SEG4
Data Register page 4, address B2H
LD B2H, #63h
1 1 0 0
SEG3
COM1
-SEG1
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
-VLC2
-VLC1
-VLC0
.0 .1 .2 .3
COM1
-SEG0
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
-VLC2
-VLC1
-VLC0
1 1 1 0
COM0
-SEG1
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
-VLC2
-VLC1
-VLC0
SEG2
COM0
-SEG0
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
-VLC2
-VLC1
-VLC0
.4 .5 .6 .7
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
0 1 0 1
SEG1
SEG1.7 x C3
Data Register page 4, address B1H
LD B1H, #7Ah
SEG0
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
SEG2.1 x C3
C1
SEG0.3
SEG1
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
.0 .1 .2 .3
COM3
COM2
COM3
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
SEG0.1 x C1
SEG2.0 x C2
SEG1.6
C0
COM2
SEG1.5 x C1
COM1
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
SEG0.2 x C2
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
VSS
SEG0.0 x C0
COM0
1 1 0 0
2
SEG0
1
.4 .5 .6 .7
0
0 1 1 1
3
.0 .1 .2 .3
2
COM0
COM1
FR
1
Data Register page 4, address B0H
LD B0H, #3Eh
0
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
14
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
OVERVIEW
Serial I/O modules, SIO can interface with various types of external device that require serial data transfer. The
components of SIO function block are:
•
8-bit control register (SIOCON)
•
Clock selector logic
•
8-bit data buffer (SIODATA)
•
8-bit prescaler (SIOPS)
•
3-bit serial clock counter
•
Serial data I/O pins (SI, SO)
•
Serial clock input/output pin (SCK)
The SIO module can transmit or receive 8-bit serial data at a frequency determined by its corresponding control
register settings. To ensure flexible data transmission rates, you can select an internal or external clock source.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
To program the SIO module, follow these basic steps:
1. Configure the I/O pins at port (SCK/SI/SO) by loading the appropriate value to the P1CONL register if
necessary.
2. Load an 8-bit value to the SIOCON control register to properly configure the serial I/O module. In this
operation, SIOCON.2 must be set to "1" to enable the data shifter.
3. For interrupt generation, set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit (SIOCON) to "1".
4. When you transmit data to the serial buffer, write data to SIODATA and set SIOCON.3 to 1, the shift
operation starts.
5. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, the SIO pending bit (SIOCON.0) are set to "1" and
SIO interrupt request is generated.
14-1
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SIO CONTROL REGISTERS (SIOCON)
The control register for serial I/O interface module, SIOCON, is located at E1H in set 1, bank 0. It has the control
setting for SIO module.
•
Clock source selection (internal or external) for shift clock
•
Interrupt enable
•
Edge selection for shift operation
•
Clear 3-bit counter and start shift operation
•
Shift operation (transmit) enable
•
Mode selection (transmit/receive or receive-only)
•
Data direction selection (MSB first or LSB first)
A reset clears the SIOCON value to "00H". This configures the corresponding module with an internal clock
source at the SCK, selects receive-only operating mode, and clears the 3-bit counter. The data shift operation
and the interrupt are disabled. The selected data direction is MSB-first.
Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON)
E1H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
SIO shift clock selection bit:
0 = Internal clock (P.S Clock)
1 = External clock (SCK)
Data direction control bit:
0 = MSB-first mode
1 = LSB-first mode
SIO mode selection bit:
0 = Receive only mode
1 = Transmit/receive mode
Shift clock edge selection bit:
0 = TX at falling edges, Rx at rising edges
1 = TX at rising edges, Rx at falling edges
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
SIO interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending condition
(when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
SIO interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable SIO interrupt
1 = Enable SIO interrupt
SIO shift operation enable bit:
0 = Disable shifter and clock counter
1 = Enable shifter and clock counter
SIO counter clear and shift start bit:
0 = No action
1 = Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
Figure 14-1. Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON)
14-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
SIO PRE-SCALER REGISTER (SIOPS)
The prescaler register for serial I/O interface module, SIOPS, is located at E3H in set 1, bank 0.
The value stored in the SIO pre-scaler register, SIOPS, lets you determine the SIO clock rate (baud rate) as
follows:
Baud rate
= Input clock (fxx/4)/(Prescaler value + 1),
or SCK input clock.
SIO Pre-scaler Register (SIOPS)
E3H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Baud rate = (fXX/4)/(SIOPS + 1)
Figure 14-2. SIO Prescaler Register (SIOPS)
SIO BLOCK DIAGRAM
CLK
SIO INT
3-Bit Counter
Clear
SIOCON.0
Pending
SIOCON.1
(Interrupt Enable)
SIOCON.3
SIOCON.7
SIOCON.2
(Shift Enable)
SIOCON.4
(Edge Select)
M
SCK
SIOPS (E3H, set 1, bank 0)
fxx/2
8-bit P.S.
1/2
U
X
SIOCON.5
(Mode Select)
CLK 8-Bit SIO Shift Buffer
(SIODATA, E2H, set 1, bank 0)
8
SO
SIOCON.6
(LSB/MSB First
Mode Select)
SI
Data Bus
Figure 14-3. SIO Functional Block Diagram
14-3
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
SERIAL I/O TIMING DIAGRAM (SIO)
SCK
SI
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
Transmit
Complete
SIO INT
Set SIOCON.3
Figure 14-4. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0)
SCK
SI
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
Transmit
Complete
SIO INT
Set SIOCON.3
Figure 14-5. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1)
14-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
15
BATTERY LEVEL DETECTOR
BATTERY LEVEL DETECTOR
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X micro-controller has a built-in BLD (Battery Level Detector) circuit which allows
detection of power voltage drop or external input level through software. Turning the BLD operation on and off can
be controlled by software. Because the IC consumes a large amount of current during BLD operation. It is
recommended that the BLD operation should be kept OFF unless it is necessary. Also the BLD criteria voltage
can be set by the software. The criteria voltage can be set by matching to one of the 3 kinds of voltage below that
can be used.
2.2 V, 2.4 V or 2.8 V (VDD reference voltage), or external input level (External reference voltage)
The BLD block works only when BLDCON.3 is set. If VDD level is lower than the reference voltage selected with
BLDCON.2–.0, BLDCON.4 will be set. If VDD level is higher, BLDCON.4 will be cleared. When users need to
minimize current consumption, do not operate the BLD block.
VDD Pin
fBLD
BLDCON.5
Battery
Level
Detector
BLDCON.4
BLD Out
MUX
BLDCON.3
VBLDREF/P2.0
Battery
Level
Setting
BLD Run
P2CONL.1-.0
ExtRef Input
Enable
BLDCON.2-0
Set the Level
Figure 15-1. Block Diagram for Voltage Level Detect
15-1
BATTERY LEVEL DETECTOR
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
BATTERY LEVEL DETECTOR CONTROL REGISTER (BLDCON)
The bit 3 of BLDCON controls to run or disable the operation of Battery Level Detector. Basically this VBLD is set
as 2.2V by system reset and it can be changed in 3 kinds voltages by selecting Battery Level Detector Control
Register (BLDCON). When you write 3-bit data value to BLDCON, an established resistor string is selected and
the VBLD is fixed in accordance with this resistor. Table 15-1 shows specific VBLD of 3 levels.
Resistor String
Battery Level Detector Control Register
F4H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W, Reset : 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Not used
RBLD
VIN
Mux
+
Comparator
BLD OUT
VREF
Bias
VBAT
VBLDREF
fBLD
BANDGAP
BLD Enable/Disable
P2CONL.1-.0
NOTES:
1. The reset value of BLDCON is #00H.
2. VREF is about 1 volt.
Figure 15-2. Battery Level Detect Circuit and Control Register
Table 15-1. BLDCON Value and Detection Level
BLDCON .2−.0
0
0
0
2.2 V
1
0
1
2.4 V
0
1
1
2.8 V
Other values
15-2
VBLD
Not available
LSB
S3F8275X
16
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
OVERVIEW
This chapter is only for the S3F8275X. The S3F8275X has an on-chip full-flash memory internally instead of
masked ROM. The flash memory is accessed by "LDC" instruction and the type of sector erase and a byte
programmable flash, a user can program the data in the flash memory area any time you want. The S3F8275X's
embedded 16K-byte memory has two operating features:
•
User program mode: S3F8275X only
•
Tool program mode: Refer to the chapter 19. S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU.
16-1
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
USER PROGRAM MODE
This mode supports sector erase, byte programming, byte read and one protection mode (Hard lock protection).
The read protection mode is available only in Tool Program mode. So in order to make a chip into read protection,
you need to select a read protection option when you program an initial your code to a chip by using Tool Program
mode by using a programming tool.
The S3F8275X has the pumping circuit internally. Therefore, 12.5V into VPP (test) pin is not needed. To program
a flash memory in this mode several control registers will be used. There are four kind functions– programming,
reading, sector erase, hard lock protection.
FLASH MEMORY CONTROL REGISTERS (USER PROGRAM MODE)
Flash Memory Control Register
FMCON register is available only in user program mode to select the Flash Memory operation mode; sector erase,
byte programming, and to make the flash memory into a hard lock protection.
Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON)
F0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
Flash memory mode selection bits:
0101 = Programming mode
1010 = Sector erase mode
0110 = Hard lock mode
others = Not available
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash operation start bit:
0 = Operation stop
1 = Operation start
(This bit will be cleared automatically
just after the corresponding operation
completed).
Not used for S3F8275X
Sector erase status bit:
0 = Success sector erase
1 = Fail sector erase
Figure 16-1. Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON)
The bit 0 of FMCON register (FMCON.0) is a start bit for Erase and Hard Lock operation mode. Therefore,
operation of Erase and Hard Lock mode is activated when you set FMCON.0 to "1". Also you should wait a time of
Erase (Sector erase) or Hard lock to complete it's operation before a byte programming or a byte read of same
sector area by using "LDC" instruction. When you read or program a byte data from or into flash memory, this bit
is not needed to manipulate.
The sector erase status bit is read only. If an interrupt is requested during the operation of "Sector erase", the
operation of "Sector Erase" is discontinued, and the interrupt is served by CPU. Therefore, the sector erase status
bit should be checked after executing "Sector Erase". The "Sector Erase" operation is success if the bit is logic
"0", and is failure if the bit is logic "1".
NOTE: When the ID code, "A5H", is written to the FMUSR register. A mode of sector erase, user program, and hard lock may
be executed unfortunately. So, It should be careful of the above situation.
16-2
S3F8275X
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register
The FMUSR register is used for a safety operation of the flash memory. This register will protect undesired erase
or program operation from malfunctioning of CPU caused by an electrical noise. After reset, the user-programming
mode is disabled, because the value of FMUSR is "00000000B" by reset operation. If necessary to operate the
flash memory, you can use the user programming mode by setting the value of FMUSR to "10100101B". The
other value of "10100101b", user program mode is disabled.
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR)
F1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash memory user programming enable bits:
10100101: Enable user programming mode
Other values: Disable user programming mode
Figure 16-2. Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR)
16-3
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
Flash Memory Sector Address Registers
There are two sector address registers for addressing a sector to be erased. The FMSECL (Flash Memory Sector
Address Register Low Byte) indicates the low byte of sector address and FMSECH (Flash Memory Sector
Address Register High Byte) indicates the high byte of sector address.
The FMSECH is needed for S3F8275X because it has 128 sectors, respectively. One sector consist of 128-bytes.
Each sector's address starts XX00H or XX80H, that is, a base address of sector is XX00H or XX80H. So FMSECL
register 6-0 don't mean whether the value is ‘1' or '0'. We recommend that the simplest way is to load sector base
address into FMSECH and FMSECL register.
When programming the flash memory, you should write data after loading sector base address located in the
target address to write data into FMSECH and FMSECL register. If the next operation is also to write data, you
should check whether next address is located in the same sector or not. It case of other sectors, you must load
sector address to FMSECH and FMSECL register according to the sector.
Flash Memory Sector Address Register, High Byte (FMSECH)
F2H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash Memory Setor Address (High Byte)
NOTE:
The high-byte flash memory sector address pointer
value is the higher eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
Figure 16-3. Flash Memory Sector Address Register, High Byte (FMSECH)
Flash Memory Sector Address Register, Low Byte (FMSECL)
F3H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Don't care
Flash Memory Sector Address (Low Byte)
NOTE:
The low-byte flash memory sector address pointer
value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
Figure 16-4. Flash Memory Sector Address Register, Low Byte (FMSECL)
16-4
S3F8275X
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
ISPTM (ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING) SECTOR
ISPTM sectors located in program memory area can store on board program software (boot program code for
upgrading application code by interfacing with I/O pin). The ISPTM sectors can not be erased or programmed by
LDC instruction for the safety of On Board Program software.
The ISP sectors are available only when the ISP enable/disable bit is set 0, that is, enable ISP at the Smart
Option. If you don't like to use ISP sector, this area can be used as a normal program memory (can be erased or
programmed by LDC instruction) by setting ISP disable bit ("1") at the Smart Option. Even if ISP sector is
selected, ISP sector can be erased or programmed in the Tool Program mode, by Serial programming tools. The
size of ISP sector can be varied by settings of Smart Option. You can choose appropriate ISP sector size
according to the size of On Board Program software.
(HEX)
3FFFH
(Decimal)
16,383
16K-bytes
Internal Program
Memory Area
8FFH
255
Available
ISP Sector Area
FFH
Interrupt Vector Area
3FH
Smart Option Area
3CH
0
00H
S3F8275X
Figure 16-5. Program Memory Address Space
16-5
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
Table 16-1. ISP Sector Size
Smart Option(003EH) ISP Size Selection Bit
Area of ISP Sector
ISP Sector Size
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
1
x
x
−
0
0
0
0
100H – 1FFH (256 byte)
256 Bytes
0
0
1
100H – 2FFH (512 byte)
512 Bytes
0
1
0
100H – 4FFH (1024 byte)
1024 Bytes
0
1
1
100H – 8FFH (2048 byte)
2048 Bytes
NOTE: The area of the ISP sector selected by Smart Option bit (003EH.2 − 003EH.0) can not be erased and programmed
by LDC instruction in user program mode.
ISP Reset Vector and ISP Sector Size
If you use ISP sectors by setting the ISP enable/disable bit to "0" and the Reset Vector Selection bit to "0" at the
Smart Option, you can choose the reset vector address of CPU as shown in Table 16-3 by setting the ISP Reset
Vector Address Selection bits.
Table 16-2. Reset Vector Address
Smart Option (003EH) ISP Reset
Vector Address Selection Bit
Reset Vector
Address After POR
Usable Area for ISP
Sector
ISP Sector Size
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
1
x
x
0100H
−
−
0
0
0
0200H
100H − 1FFH
256 Bytes
0
0
1
0300H
100H − 2FFH
512 Bytes
0
1
0
0500H
100H − 4FFH
1024 Bytes
0
1
1
0900H
100H − 8FFH
2048 Bytes
NOTE: The selection of the ISP reset vector address by smart option (003EH.7 – 003EH.5) is not dependent of the
selection of ISP sector size by smart option (003EH.2 – 003EH.0).
16-6
S3F8275X
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
SECTOR ERASE
User can erase a flash memory partially by using sector erase function only in User Program Mode. The only unit
of flash memory to be erased and programmed in User Program Mode is called sector.
The program memory of S3F8275X is divided into 128 sectors for unit of erase and programming. Every sector
has all 128-byte sizes of program memory areas. So each sector should be erased first to program a new data
(byte) into a sector. Minimum 10ms delay time for erase is required after setting sector address and triggering
erase start bit (FMCON.0). Sector Erase is not supported in Tool Program Modes (MDS mode tool or
Programming tool).
3FFFH
Sector 127 (128 Byte)
Sector 126 (128 Byte)
3F7FH
3EFFH
1FFFH
Sector 63 (128 Byte)
1F7FH
05FFH
Sector 11 (128 Byte)
057FH
Sector 10 (128 Byte)
Sector 0-9
(128 byte x 10)
0500H
04FFH
0000H
S3F8275X
Figure 16-6. Sector Configurations in User Program Mode
16-7
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
The Sector Erase Procedure in User Program Mode
1. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "10100101B".
2. Set Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH/FMSECL).
3. Check user’s ID code (written by user).
4. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to "10100001B".
5. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "00000000B"
6. Check the "sector erase status bit" whether "sector erase" is success or not.
PROGRAMMING TIP ⎯ Sector Erase
•
•
reErase:
SB1
LD
LD
LD
CP
JR
LD
NOP
NOP
LD
TM
JR
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User program mode enable
FMSECH,#10H
FMSECL,#00H
; Set sector address (1000H − 107FH)
UserID_Code,#User_value ; Check user’s ID code (written by user)
; User_value is any value by user
NE,Not_ID_Code
; If not equal, jump to Not_ID_Code
FMCON,#10100001B
; Start sector erase
; Dummy instruction, this instruction must be needed
; Dummy instruction, this instruction must be needed
FMUSR,#0
; User program mode disable
FMCON,#00001000B
; Check "Sector erase status bit"
NZ,reErase
; Jump to reErase if fail
•
•
•
•
Not_ID_Code:
SB1
LD
•
•
•
•
16-8
FMUSR,#0
; User Program mode disable
S3F8275X
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
PROGRAMMING
A flash memory is programmed in one byte unit after sector erase. And for programming safety's sake, must set
FMSECH and FMSECL to flash memory sector value.
The write operation of programming starts by 'LDC' instruction.
You can write until 128byte, because this flash sector's limits is 128byte.
So if you written 128byte, must reset FMSECH and FMSECL.
The Program Procedure in User program Mode
1. Must erase sector before programming.
2. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to “10100101B”.
3. Set Flash Memory Sector Register (FMSECH, FMSECL) to sector value of write address.
4. Load a flash memory upper address into upper register of pair working register.
5. Load a flash memory lower address into lower register of pair working register.
6. Load a transmission data into a working register.
7. Check user’s ID code (written by user)
8. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to “01010001B”.
9. Load transmission data to flash memory location area on ‘LDC’ instruction by indirectly addressing mode
10. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to “00000000B”.
16-9
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
PROGRAMMING TIP ⎯ Program
•
•
SB1
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
CP
JR
LD
LDC
NOP
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User Program mode enable
FMSECH,#17H
FMSECL,#80H
; Set sector address (1780H−17FFH)
R2,#17H
; Set a ROM address in the same sector 1780H−17FFH
R3,#84H
R4,#78H
; Temporary data
UserID_Code,#User_value ; Check user’s ID code (written by user)
; User_value is any value by user
NE,Not_ID_Code
; If not equal, jump to Not_ID_Code
FMCON,#01010001B
; Start program
@RR2,R4
; Write the data to a address of same sector(1784H)
; Dummy Instruction, This instruction must be needed
FMUSR,#0
; User Program mode disable
•
•
•
•
Not_ID_Code:
SB1
LD
•
•
•
•
16-10
FMUSR,#0
; User Program mode disable
S3F8275X
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
READING
The read operation of programming starts by 'LDC' instruction.
The Reading Procedure in User Program Mode
1. Load a flash memory upper address into upper register of pair working register.
2. Load a flash memory lower address into lower register of pair working register.
3. Load receive data from flash memory location area on 'LDC' instruction by indirectly addressing mode.
PROGRAMMING TIP ⎯ Reading
•
•
LOOP:
LD
R2,#3H
LD
R3,#0
LDC
R0,@RR2
INC
CP
JP
R3
R3,#0H
NZ,LOOP
; Load flash memory upper address
; To upper of pair working register
; Load flash memory lower address
; To lower pair working register
; Read data from flash memory location
; (Between 300H and 3FFH)
•
•
•
•
16-11
EMBEDDED FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
S3F8275X
HARD LOCK PROTECTION
User can set Hard Lock Protection by write ‘0110’ in FMCON.7−4. If this function is enabled, the user cannot write
or erase the data in a flash memory area. This protection can be released by the chip erase execution (in the tool
program mode).
In terms of user program mode, the procedure of setting Hard Lock Protection is following that. Whereas in tool
mode the manufacturer of serial tool writer could support Hardware Protection. Please refer to the manual of serial
program writer tool provided by the manufacturer.
The Hard Lock Protection Procedure in User program Mode
1. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to “10100101B”.
2. Check user’s ID code (written by user)
3. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to “01100001B”.
4. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to “00000000B”.
PROGRAMMING TIP ⎯ Hard Lock Protection
•
•
SB1
LD
CP
JR
LD
NOP
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User Program mode enable
UserID_Code,#User_value ; Check user’s ID code (written by user)
; User_value is any value by user
NE,Not_ID_Code
; If not equal, jump to Not_ID_Code
FMCON,#01100001B
; Hard Lock mode set & start
; Dummy Instruction, This instruction must be needed
FMUSR,#0
; User Program mode disable
•
•
•
•
Not_ID_Code:
SB1
LD
•
•
•
•
16-12
FMUSR,#0
; User Program mode disable
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
17
ELECTRICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL DATA
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs. The
information is arranged in the following order:
•
Absolute maximum ratings
•
D.C. electrical characteristics
•
Data retention supply voltage in Stop mode
•
Stop mode release timing when initiated by an external interrupt
•
Stop mode release timing when initiated by a RESET
•
I/O capacitance
•
A.C. electrical characteristics
•
Input timing for external interrupts
•
Input timing for RESET
•
Serial data transfer timing
•
BLD electrical characteristics
•
LVR electrical characteristics
•
Oscillation characteristics
•
Oscillation stabilization time
•
Operating voltage range
•
A.C. electrical characteristics for Internal flash ROM
17-1
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 17-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
(TA =
25 °C)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
VDD
−
Supply voltage
Input voltage
VI
Output voltage
VO
Output current High
I OH
I OL
Output current Low
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Rating
− 0.3
Ports 0–6
−
Unit
to + 4.6
V
− 0.3
to VDD + 0.3
V
− 0.3
to
V
VDD + 0.3
One I/O pin active
− 15
All I/O pins active
− 60
One I/O pin active
+ 30 (Peak value)
Total pin current for ports
+ 100 (Peak value)
mA
mA
TA
−
− 25
to
+ 85
°C
TSTG
−
− 65
to
+ 150
°C
Table 17-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics
(TA =
− 25 °C
to
+ 85 °C, VDD =
Parameter
Symbol
Operating voltage
VDD
2.0 V
to
3.6 V)
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fx = 0.4 − 4.2MHz, fxt = 32.8kHz
2.0
−
3.6
V
fx = 0.4 − 8.0MHz
2.5
−
3.6
−
VDD
VIH1
All input pins except for VIH2, VIH3
0.7 VDD
VIH2
Ports 0-1, nRESET
0.8 VDD
VDD
VIH3
XIN, XOUT and XTIN, XTOUT
VDD – 0.1
VDD
VIL1
All input pins except for VIL2, VIL3
−
−
0.3 VDD
VIL2
Ports 0-1, nRESET
−
−
0.2 VDD
VIL3
XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT
−
−
0.1
Output high
voltage
VOH
VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V;
All output ports; IOH =
VDD – 1.0
−
–
V
Output low
voltage
VOL1
VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V
IOL = 15mA
Ports 0-1
−
−
1.0
V
VOL2
VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V
IOL = 10mA
All output ports except for VOL1
−
−
1.0
V
ILIH1
VI = VDD
All input pins except for ILIH2
−
−
3
µA
ILIH2
VI = VDD
XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT
Input high voltage
Input low voltage
Input high leakage
current
17-2
V
V
−1 mA
20
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
(TA =
− 25°C
Parameter
to
+ 85°C, VDD =
Symbol
2.0 V
to
3.6 V)
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
µA
ILIL1
VI = 0 V;
All input pins except nRESET,
ILIL2
−
−
–3
ILIL2
VI = 0 V;
XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT
−
−
–20
Output high
leakage current
ILOH
VO = VDD
All output pins
−
−
3
Output low
leakage current
ILOL
VO = 0 V
All output pins
−
−
–3
Pull-up resistors
RL1
VI = 0 V; VDD = 3V, TA = 25°C
Ports 0–6
40
70
100
RL2
VI = 0 V; VDD = 3V, TA = 25°C
nRESET
220
360
500
ROSC1
VDD = 3 V, TA = 25 °C
XIN = VDD, XOUT = 0V
600
1700
3000
ROSC2
VDD = 3 V, TA = 25 °C
XTIN = VDD, XTOUT = 0 V
2000
4000
8000
LCD voltage
dividing resistor
RLCD
TA = 25 °C
60
110
160
kΩ
⏐VLCD-COMi⏐
voltage drop
(i = 0-3)
VDC
− 15 µA per common pin
−
−
120
mV
⏐VLCD-SEGx⏐
voltage drop
(x = 0–31)
VDS
− 15 µA per common pin
−
−
120
Middle output
voltage (1)
VLC1
VDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, 1/3 bias
LCD clock = 0Hz, VLC0 = VDD
2/3VDD–0.2
2/3VDD
2/3VDD+ 0.2
1/3VDD–0.2
1/3VDD
1/3VDD+ 0.2
Input low
leakage current
Oscillator feed
back resistors
VLC2
kΩ
kΩ
V
NOTE: It is middle output voltage when the VLC0 pin is opened.
17-3
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 17-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded)
(TA =
− 25°C
to
+ 85°C, VDD =
Parameter
Symbol
Supply current (1)
IDD1(2)
IDD2(2)
2.0 V
to
3.6 V)
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
−
3.0
6.0
mA
Run mode:
VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
8.0 MHz
Crystal oscillator
C1 = C2 = 22pF
4.0 MHz
1.5
3.0
Idle mode:
VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
8.0 MHz
0.5
1.6
Crystal oscillator
C1 = C2 = 22pF
4.0 MHz
0.4
1.2
IDD3(3)
Run mode: VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V,
32 kHz crystal oscillator
TA = 25 °C, OSCCON.7=1
12.0
25.0
IDD4(3)
Idle mode: VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V,
32 kHz crystal oscillator
TA = 25 °C, OSCCON.7=1
2.0
4.0
IDD5(4)
Stop mode;
VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
0.2
2.0
−
10
TA = 25 °C
TA = −25 °C ~
µA
+85 °C
NOTES:
1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors, LCD voltage dividing resistors, the
LVR block, and external output current loads.
2. IDD1 and IDD2 include power consumption for sub clock oscillation.
3. IDD3 and IDD4 are current when main clock oscillation stops and the sub clock is used (OSCCON.7=1).
4. IDD5 is current when main clock and sub clock oscillation stops.
5.
17-4
Every values in this table is measured when bits 4-3 of the system clock control register (CLKCON.4-.3) is set to 11B.
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-3. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode
(TA
=
− 25 °C
to
Parameter
+ 85 °C)
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Data retention supply
voltage
VDDDR
−
2.0
−
3.6
V
Data retention supply
current
IDDDR
−
−
1
µA
Stop mode, TA = 25 °C
VDDDR = 2.0 V
Disable LVR block
Idle Mode
(Basic Timer Active)
~
~
Stop Mode
Normal
Operating Mode
Data Retention Mode
~
~
VDD
VDDDR
Execution of
STOP Instruction
0.8 VDD
tWAIT
NOTE:
tWAIT is the same as 16 x 1/BT clock.
Figure 17-1. Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by an External Interrupt
17-5
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Oscillation
Stabilization
TIme
RESET
Occurs
~
~
Stop Mode
Normal
Operating Mode
Data Retention Mode
~
~
VDD
VDDDR
Execution of
STOP Instrction
nRESET
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
NOTE:
tWAIT
tWAIT is the same as 16 × 1/BT clock.
Figure 17-2. Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by a RESET
Table 17-4. Input/Output Capacitance
(TA =
−25 °C ~ + 85 °C, VDD = 0 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Input
capacitance
CIN
f = 1 MHz; unmeasured pins
are connected to VSS
−
−
10
pF
Output
capacitance
COUT
I/O capacitance
17-6
CIO
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-5. A.C. Electrical Characteristics
(TA =
− 25°C
to
+ 85°C, VDD = 2.0 V
Parameter
to
Symbol
tKCY
SCK cycle time
tKH, tKL
SCK high, low width
tSIK
SI setup time to SCK high
tKSI
SI hold time to SCK high
tKSO
Output delay for SCK to SO
3.6 V)
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
External SCK source
1,000
−
−
ns
Internal SCK source
1,000
External SCK source
500
Internal SCK source
tKCY/2−50
External SCK source
250
Internal SCK source
250
External SCK source
400
Internal SCK source
400
External SCK source
−
−
300
ns
Internal SCK source
250
Interrupt input, High, Low width
tINTH,
tINTL
All interrupt
VDD = 3 V
500
700
−
ns
nRESET input Low width
tRSL
Input
VDD = 3 V
10
−
−
µs
tINTL
External
Interrupt
tINTH
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
NOTE:
The unit tCPU means one CPU clock period.
Figure 17-3. Input Timing for External Interrupts
17-7
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
tRSL
nRESET
0.2 VDD
Figure 17-4. Input Timing for RESET
tKCY
tKL
tKH
SCK
0.8VDD
0.2VDD
tSIK
tKSI
0.8VDD
SI
0.2VDD
tKSO
SO
Output Data
Figure 17-5. Serial Data Transfer Timing
17-8
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-6. Battery Level Detector Electrical Characteristics
(TA =
25°C,
VDD = 2.0 V
Parameter
Operating voltage of BLD
to
3.6 V)
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VDDBLD
−
2.0
−
3.6
V
BLDCON.2-.0 = 000b
2.0
2.2
2.4
BLDCON.2-.0 = 101b
2.15
2.4
2.65
BLDCON.2-.0 = 011b
2.5
2.8
3.1
VDD = 3.3 V
−
70
120
VDD = 2.2 V
−
50
100
VBLD
Voltage of BLD
IBLD
Current consumption
µA
Hysteresis voltage of BLD
∆V
BLDCON.2-0 = 000b,
101b, 011b
−
10
100
mV
BLD circuit response time
TB
Fw = 32.768 kHz
−
−
1
ms
Table 17-7. LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Electrical Characteristics
(TA =
25°C)
Parameter
Voltage of LVR
Symbol
VLVR
Conditions
TA = 25 °C
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
2.0
2.2
2.4
V
tR
−
10
−
−
µs
VDD voltage off time
tOFF
−
0.5
−
−
s
Hysteresis voltage of LVR
∆V
−
−
10
100
mV
−
70
120
µA
VDD voltage rising time
Current consumption
IDDPR
VDD = 3.3 V
NOTES:
1. The current of LVR circuit is consumed when LVR is enabled by "Smart Option"
2. Current consumed when low voltage reset circuit is provided internally.
tOFF
VDD
tR
0.9 VDD
0.1 VDD
Figure 17-6. LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Timing
17-9
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 17-8. Main Oscillation Characteristics
(TA
=
− 25°C
Oscillator
to
+
85°C)
Clock Configuration
Crystal
C1
XIN
Parameter
Main oscillation
frequency
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Units
2.5 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
8
MHz
2.0 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
4.2
2.5 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
8
2.0 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
4.2
2.5 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
8
2.0 V − 3.6 V
0.4
−
4.2
3.3 V
0.4
−
1
MHz
XOUT
Ceramic
oscillator
C1
XIN
Main oscillation
frequency
XOUT
XIN input frequency
External
clock
XIN
XOUT
RC
oscillator
Frequency
XIN
R
XOUT
Table 17-9. Sub Oscillation Characteristics
(TA
=
− 25°C
Oscillator
Crystal
to
+
85°C)
Clock Configuration
C1
XTIN
Parameter
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Sub oscillation
frequency
2.0 V − 3.6 V
32
32.768
35
kHz
XTIN input
frequency
2.0 V − 3.6 V
32
−
100
XTOUT
VREG
104
External
clock
XTIN
XTOUT
17-10
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-10. Main Oscillation Stabilization Time
(TA
− 25 °C
=
to
+ 85 °C, VDD = 2.0 V
Oscillator
to
3.6 V)
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Crystal
fx > 1 MHz
−
−
40
ms
Ceramic
Oscillation stabilization occurs when VDD is
equal to the minimum oscillator voltage
range.
−
−
10
ms
External clock
XIN input high and low width (tXH, tXL)
62.5
−
1250
ns
1/fx
tXL
tX
XIN
VDD-0.1 V
0.1 V
Figure 17-7. Clock Timing Measurement at XIN
17-11
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 17-11. Sub Oscillation Stabilization Time
(TA
− 25 °C
=
Oscillator
to
+ 85 °C, VDD = 2.0 V
to
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
–
−
−
10
s
5
−
15
µs
Crystal
External clock
3.6 V)
XTIN input high and low width (tXH, tXL)
1/fxt
tXTL
tXTH
XTIN
VDD-0.1 V
0.1 V
Figure 17-8. Clock Timing Measurement at XTIN
17-12
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
ELECTRICAL DATA
Instruction Clock
fx (Main/Sub oscillation frequency)
8 MHz
2 MHz
1.05 MHz
4.2 MHz
6.25 kHz(main)/8.2 kHz(sub)
400 kHz (main)/32.8 kHz(sub)
1
2
3
2.5
3.6
4
Supply Voltage (V)
Instruction Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1, 2, 8, 16)
Figure 17-9. Operating Voltage Range
Table 17-12. A.C. Electrical Characteristics for Internal Flash ROM
(TA
=
− 25 °C
to
+ 85 °C, VDD = 2.2 V
Parameter
to
3.6 V)
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Programming time (1)
Ftp
−
30
−
−
µs
Chip erasing time (2)
Ftp1
−
50
−
−
ms
Sector erasing time (3)
Ftp2
−
10
−
−
ms
Data access time
FtRS
−
−
25
−
ns
FNwe
−
−
−
10,000(4)
Times
Number of writing/erasing
NOTES:
1. The programming time is the time during which one byte (8-bit) is programmed.
2. The chip erasing time is the time during which all 16K byte block is erased.
3. The sector erasing time is the time during which all 128 byte block is erased.
4. Maximum number of writing/erasing is 10,000 times for full-flash(S3F8275X) and 100 times for half-flash
(S3F8278X/F8274X).
5. The chip erasing is available in Tool Program Mode only.
17-13
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
18
MECHANICAL DATA
MECHANICAL DATA
OVERVIEW
The S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller is currently available in a 64-pin QFP and LQFP package.
23.90 ± 0.30
0-8
20.00 ± 0.20
14.00 ± 0.20
+ 0.10
- 0.05
0.10 MAX
64-QFP-1420F
0.80 ± 0.20
17.90 ± 0.30
0.15
#64
#1
1.00
+ 0.10
0.40 - 0.05
0.15 MAX
0.05 MIN
(1.00)
2.65 ± 0.10
3.00 MAX
0.80 + 0.20
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 18-1. 64-Pin QFP Package Dimensions (64-QFP-1420F)
18-1
MECHANICAL DATA
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
12.00 BSC
10.00 BSC
0-7
10.00 BSC
0.08 MAX
64-LQFP-1010
0.45~0.75
12.00 BSC
0.09~0.20
#64
#1
0.20
+ 0.07
- 0.03
0.50 BSC
0.10 ± 0.05
1.40 ± 0.05
1.60 MAX
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 18-2. 64-Pin LQFP Package Dimensions (64-LQFP-1010)
18-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
19
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
OVERVIEW
The S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X single-chip CMOS microcontroller is the Flash MCU version of the
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller. It has an on-chip Flash ROM instead of masked ROM. The Flash
ROM is accessed by serial data format.
The S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X is fully compatible with the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X, both in function and in
pin configuration. Because of its simple programming requirements, the S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X is ideal for
use as an evaluation chip for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X.
NOTE: This chapter is about the Tool Program Mode of Flash MCU. If you want to know the User Program Mode, refer to the
chapter 16. Embedded Flash Memory Interface.
19-1
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
SEG1/P5.6
SEG2/P5.5
SEG3/P5.4
SEG4/P5.3
SEG5/P5.2
SEG6/P5.1
SEG7/P5.0
SEG8/P4.7
SEG9/P4.6
SEG10/P4.5
SEG11/P4.4
SEG12/P4.3
SEG13/P4.2
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
S3F8275X
S3F8278X
S3F8274X
(64-QFP-1420F)
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SEG14/P4.1
SEG15/P4.0
SEG16/P3.7
SEG17/P3.6
SEG18/P3.5
SEG19/P3.4
SEG20/P3.3
SEG21/P3.2
SEG22/P3.1
SEG23/P3.0
SEG24/P2.7
SEG25/P2.6
SEG26/P2.5
SEG27/P2.4
SEG28/P2.3
SEG29/P2.2
SEG30/P2.1
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
P1.7/INT7
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/T1CLK
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.7/BUZ
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
P1.3/INT3
P1.4/INT4
P1.5/INT5
P1.6/INT6
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SEG0/P5.7
COM0/P6.0
COM1/P6.1
COM2/P6.2
COM3/P6.3
VLC0
SDAT/VLC1
SCLK/VLC2
VDD/VDD
VSS/VSS
XOUT
XIN
VPP/TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
nRESET/nRESET
VREG
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
Figure 19-1. S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-QFP-1420F)
19-2
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
SEG1/P5.6
SEG2/P5.5
SEG3/P5.4
SEG4/P5.3
SEG5/P5.2
SEG6/P5.1
SEG7/P5.0
SEG8/P4.7
SEG9/P4.6
SEG10/P4.5
SEG11/P4.4
SEG12/P4.3
SEG13/P4.2
SEG14/P4.1
SEG15/P4.0
SEG16/P3.7
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
S3F8275X
S3F8278X
S3F8274X
(64-LQFP-1010)
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
SEG17/P3.6
SEG18/P3.5
SEG19/P3.4
SEG20/P3.3
SEG21/P3.2
SEG22/P3.1
SEG23/P3.0
SEG24/P2.7
SEG25/P2.6
SEG26/P2.5
SEG27/P2.4
SEG28/P2.3
SEG29/P2.2
SEG30/P2.1
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
P1.7/INT7
VREG
P0.0/INT0
P0.1/INT1
P0.2/INT2
P0.3/T1CLK
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.5/TBOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P0.7/BUZ
P1.0/SCK
P1.1/SO
P1.2/SI
P1.3/INT3
P1.4/INT4
P1.5/INT5
P1.6/INT6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SEG0/P5.7
COM0/P6.0
COM1/P6.1
COM2/P6.2
COM3/P6.3
VLC0
SDAT/VLC1
SCLK/VLC2
VDD/VDD
VSS/VSS
XOUT
XIN
VPP/TEST
XTIN
XTOUT
nRESET/nRESET
Figure 19-2. S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X Pin Assignments (64-LQFP-1010)
19-3
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 19-1. Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash ROM
Main Chip
During Programming
Pin Name
Pin Name
Pin No.
I/O
Function
VLC1
SDAT
7
I/O
Serial data pin. Output port when reading and
input port when writing. Can be assigned as an
Input or push-pull output port.
VLC2
SCLK
8
I/O
Serial clock pin. Input only pin.
TEST
VPP
13
I
S3F8278X/F8274X: Power supply pin for Flash
ROM cell reading/writing. 12.5V is applied in
Flash writing mode and 3.3V is applied in Flash
reading mode.
S3F8275X: Power supply pin for Flash ROM cell
reading/writing. 3.3V is applied in Flash
reading/writing mode because internal block
makes 12.5V. So, TEST pin must be connected
to VDD.
nRESET
nRESET
16
I
Chip initialization
VDD/VSS
VDD/VSS
9 / 10
I
Power supply pin for logic circuit.
VDD should be tied to +3.3 V during
programming.
Table 19-2. Comparison of S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X and S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X Features
Characteristic
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X
S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X
Program memory
16/8/4-Kbyte Flash ROM
16/8/4-Kbyte mask ROM
Operating voltage (VDD)
2.0 V
2.0 V
Flash ROM programming mode
VDD = 3.3 V, VPP(TEST)=12.5V
Pin configuration
64-QFP, 64-LQFP
64-QFP, 64-LQFP
Flash ROM programmability
User Program multi time
Programmed at the factory
to
3.6 V
NOTE: The VPP (Test) pin must be connected to VDD (S3F8275X only).
19-4
to
3.6 V
−
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
OPERATING MODE CHARACTERISTICS
When 12.5 V is supplied to the VPP(TEST) pin of the S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X, the Flash ROM programming
mode is entered.
The operating mode (read, write, or read protection) is selected according to the input signals to the pins listed in
Table 19-3 below.
Table 19-3. Operating Mode Selection Criteria
VDD
VPP (TEST)
REG/MEM
Address
(A15-A0)
R/W
3.3 V
3.3 V
0
0000H
1
Flash ROM read
12.5 V
0
0000H
0
Flash ROM program
12.5 V
1
0E3FH
0
Flash ROM read protection
Mode
NOTES:
1. The VPP (Test) pin must be connected to VDD (S3F8275X only).
2.
"0" means Low level; "1" means High level.
19-5
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 19-4. D.C. Electrical Characteristics
(TA =
− 25°C
to
+ 85°C, VDD =
Parameter
Symbol
Supply current (1)
IDD1 (2)
IDD2 (2)
2.0 V
to
3.6 V)
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
−
3.0
6.0
mA
4.0 MHz
1.5
3.0
8.0 MHz
0.5
1.6
4.0 MHz
0.4
1.2
Conditions
Run mode:
VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
Crystal oscillator
C1 = C2 = 22pF
Idle mode:
VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
Crystal oscillator
C1 = C2 = 22pF
8.0 MHz
IDD3 (3)
Run mode: VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V,
32 kHz crystal oscillator
TA = 25 °C, OSCCON.7=1
12.0
25.0
IDD4 (3)
Idle mode: VDD = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V
32 kHz crystal oscillator
TA = 25 °C, OSCCON.7=1
2.0
4.0
IDD5 (4)
Stop mode;
VDD = 3.3V ± 0.3 V
0.2
2.0
−
10
TA = 25 °C
TA = −25 °C ~ +85 °C
µA
NOTES:
1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors, LCD voltage dividing resistors, the LVR
block and external output current loads.
2. IDD1 and IDD2 include power consumption for sub clock oscillation.
3. IDD3 and IDD4 are current when main clock oscillation stops and the sub clock is used (OSCCON.7=1).
4. IDD5 is current when main clock and sub clock oscillation stops.
5.
19-6
Every values in this table is measured when bits 4-3 of the system clock control register (CLKCON.4-.3) is set to 11B.
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
S3F8275X/F8278X/F8274X FLASH MCU
Instruction Clock
fx (Main/Sub oscillation frequency)
2 MHz
8 MHz
1.05 MHz
4.2 MHz
6.25 kHz (main)/8.2 kHz(sub)
400 kHz(main)/32.8 kHz(sub)
1
2
2.5
3
3.6
4
Supply Voltage (V)
Instruction Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1, 2, 8, 16)
Figure 19-3. Operating Voltage Range
19-7
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
20
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
OVERVIEW
Samsung provides a powerful and easy-to-use development support system in turnkey form. The development
support system is configured with a host system, debugging tools, and support software. For the host system, any
standard computer that operates with MS-DOS, Windows 95, and 98 as its operating system can be used. One
type of debugging tool including hardware and software is provided: the sophisticated and powerful in-circuit
emulator, SMDS2+, and OPENice for S3C7, S3C9, S3C8 families of microcontrollers. The SMDS2+ is a new and
improved version of SMDS2. Samsung also offers support software that includes debugger, assembler, and a
program for setting options.
SHINE
Samsung Host Interface for In-Circuit Emulator, SHINE, is a multi-window based debugger for SMDS2+. SHINE
provides pull-down and pop-up menus, mouse support, function/hot keys, and context-sensitive hyper-linked help.
It has an advanced, multiple-windowed user interface that emphasizes ease of use. Each window can be sized,
moved, scrolled, highlighted, added, or removed completely.
SAMA ASSEMBLER
The Samsung Arrangeable Microcontroller (SAM) Assembler, SAMA, is a universal assembler, and generates
object code in standard hexadecimal format. Assembled program code includes the object code that is used for
ROM data and required SMDS program control data. To assemble programs, SAMA requires a source file and an
auxiliary definition (DEF) file with device specific information.
SASM88
The SASM88 is a relocatable assembler for Samsung's S3C8-series microcontrollers. The SASM88 takes a
source file containing assembly language statements and translates into a corresponding source code, object
code and comments. The SASM88 supports macros and conditional assembly. It runs on the MS-DOS operating
system. It produces the relocatable object code only, so the user should link object file. Object files can be linked
with other object files and loaded into memory.
HEX2ROM
HEX2ROM file generates ROM code from HEX file which has been produced by assembler. ROM code must be
needed to fabricate a microcontroller which has a mask ROM. When generating the ROM code (.OBJ file) by
HEX2ROM, the value "FF" is filled into the unused ROM area up to the maximum ROM size of the target device
automatically.
TARGET BOARDS
Target boards are available for all S3C8-series microcontrollers. All required target system cables and adapters
are included with the device-specific target board.
20-1
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
IBM-PC AT or Compatible
RS-232C
SMDS2+
Target
Application
System
PROM/OTP Writer Unit
RAM Break/Display Unit
BUS
Probe
Adapter
Trace/Timer Unit
SAM8 Base Unit
Power Supply Unit
POD
TB8275/8/4
Target
Board
EVA
Chip
Figure 20-1. SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+)
20-2
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
TB8275/8/4 TARGET BOARD
The TB8275/8/4 target board is used for the S3C8275X/C8278X/C8274X microcontroller. It is supported with the
SMDS2+.
TB8275/8/4
+
+
OFF
STOP
IDLE
To User_VCC
ON
25
40
GND
VDD
VLC0
VLC1
VLC2
External
LCD Bias
MDS
JP6
Y1(sub-clock)
XTAL
7411
VCC
X-TAL
RESET
1
41
J101
160 QFP
S3E8270
EVA Chip
1
2
41
40
79
42
121
80
Device Selection
120
Select Smart Option Source
Low: S3F8278/4
Low: Internal
High: S3F8275
High: External
39
80
SW1
Smart Option
40-pin connector
81
1
J102
40-pin connector
100-pin connector
160
SMDS2
SMDS2+
Figure 20-2. TB8275/8/4 Target Board Configuration
20-3
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 20-1. Power Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4
"To User_Vcc"
Settings
Operating Mode
TB8275
TB8278
TB8274
To User_V CC
Off
On
Comments
Target
System
VSS
VCC
The SMDS2/SMDS2+
supplies VCC to the target
board (evaluation chip) and
the target system.
VCC
SMDS2/SMDS2+
TB8275
TB8278
TB8274
To User_V CC
Off
On
External
VCC
Target
System
VSS
The SMDS2/SMDS2+
supplies VCC only to the target
board (evaluation chip).
The target system must have
its own power supply.
VCC
SMDS2/SMDS2+
NOTE: The following symbol in the "To User_Vcc" Setting column indicates the electrical short (off) configuration:
Table 20-2. Main-clock Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4
Main Clock Settings
XIN
MDS
XTAL
Operating Mode
Set the XI switch to “MDS”
when the target board is
connected to the
SMDS2/SMDS2+.
EVA Chip
S3E8270
XIN
Comments
XOUT
No Connection
100 Pin Connector
SMDS2/SMDS2+
Set the XI switch to “XTAL”
when the target board is used
as a standalone unit, and is
not connected to the
SMDS2/SMDS2+.
XIN
XTAL
MDS
EVA Chip
S3E8270
XIN
XOUT
XTAL
Target Board
20-4
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
Table 20-3. Select Smart Option Source Setting for TB8275/8/4
"Smart Option Source"
Settings
Operating Mode
Select Smart
Option Source
Internal
TB8275/8/4
External
Select Smart
Option Source
Internal
TB8275/8/4
External
Comments
Target
System
Target
System
The Smart Option is selected
by external smart option
switch (SW1)
The Smart Option is selected
by internal smart option area
(003EH–003FH of ROM). But
this selection is not available.
Table 20-4. Smart Option Switch Settings for TB8275/8/4
"Smart Option" Settings
Smart Option
SW1
Low : "0"
The Smart Option is selected by this switch when the Smart Option
source is selected by external. The B2–B0 are comparable to the
003EH.2–.0. The B7–B5 are comparable to the 003EH.7–.5. The B8 is
comparable to the 003FH.0. The B4–B3 is not connected.
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
High: "1"
Comments
20-5
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
Table 20-5. Device Selection Settings for TB8275/8/4
"Device Selection"
Settings
Operating Mode
Comments
Operate with TB8275
Device Selection
S3F8278/4
S3F8275
TB8275
Target
System
Operate with TB8278/4
Device Selection
S3F8278/4
S3F8275
TB8278/4
Target
System
SMDS2+ SELECTION (SAM8)
In order to write data into program memory that is available in SMDS2+, the target board should be selected to be
for SMDS2+ through a switch as follows. Otherwise, the program memory writing function is not available.
Table 20-6. The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting
"JP2" Setting
Operating Mode
JP2
SMDS2
SMDS2+
R/W
SMDS2+
IDLE LED
The Yellow LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8270) is in idle mode.
STOP LED
The Red LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8270) is in stop mode.
20-6
R/W
Target
System
S3C8275X/F8275X/C8278X/F8278X/C8274X/F8274X
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
J101
P6.0/COM0
P6.2/COM2
VLC0
VLC2
VSS
N.C
N.C
nRESET
P0.0/INT0
P0.2/INT2
P0.4/TAOUT
P0.6/CLKOUT
P1.0/SCK
P1.2/SI
P1.4/INT4
P1.6/INT6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
INT7/P1.7
SEG30/P2.1
SEG28/P2.3
SEG26/P2.5
SEG24/P2.7
SEG22/P3.1
SEG20/P3.3
SEG18/P3.5
SEG16/P3.7
SEG14/P4.1
SEG12/P4.3
SEG10/P4.5
SEG8/P4.7
SEG6/P5.1
SEG4/P5.3
SEG2/P5.5
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
40-Pin DIP Connector
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
40-Pin DIP Connector
SEG31/P2.0/VBLDREF
SEG29/P2.2
SEG27/P2.4
SEG25/P2.6
SEG23/P3.0
SEG21/P3.2
SEG19/P3.4
SEG17/P3.6
SEG15/P4.0
SEG13/P4.2
SEG11/P4.4
SEG9/P4.6
SEG7/P5.0
SEG5/P5.2
SEG3/P5.4
SEG1/P5.6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Figure 20-3. 40-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB8275/8/4
Target Board
J101
40-Pin Connector
1
Target Board
J102
2 33
J102
34
J101
33
34 1
2
63
64 31
32
Target Cable for 40-pin Connector
31
32 63
64
40-Pin Connector
SEG0/P5.7
COM1/P6.1
COM3/P6.3
VLC1
VDD
N.C
TEST
N.C
VREG
INT1/P0.1
T1CLK/P0.3
TBOUT/P0.5
BUZ/P0.7
SO/P1.1
INT3/P1.3
INT5/P1.5
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
J102
Figure 20-4. S3E8270 Cables for 64-QFP Package
20-7